Skip to main content

Full text of "Essays and studies"

See other formats


ESSAYS  AND  STUDIES 

BY  MEMBERS  OF 

THE  ENGLISH  ASSOCIATION 

VOL.  XIV 

COLLECTED  BY*H.  W.  GARROD 


NUNC  COCNOSCO  EX  PARTE 


TRENT  UNIVERSITY 
LIBRARY 


ESSAYS  AND  STUDIES 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2019  with  funding  from 
Kahle/Austin  Foundation 


https://archive.org/details/essaysstudies0014unse 


ESSAYS  AND  STUDIES 


BY  MEMBERS  OF 

THE  ENGLISH  ASSOCIATION 

VOL.  XIV 


Collected  by  H.  W.  GARROD 


1929 

Reprinted  1966  for 

Wm.  DAWSON  &  SONS  LTD.,  LONDON 
with  the  permission  of 
THE  ENGLISH  ASSOCIATION 


THE  ENGLISH  ASSOCIATION 


President  1928. 

Sir  Henry  J.  Newbolt,  D.Litt.,  LL.D. 
Chairman. 

Mr.  J.  C.  Squire. 

Hon.  Treasurer. 

Mr.  J.  E.  Talbot. 

Hon.  Secretary. 

Miss  Gwendolen  Murphy. 
Secretary. 

Mr.  A.  V.  Houghton, 

4  Buckingham  Gate,  S.W.  1. 


Originally  Printed  in  Great  Britain  at 
THE  UNIVERSITY  PRESS,  OXFORD 

Reprinted  by  Photo-Lithography  in  Great  Britain  by 
WARREN  &  SON  LTD., 

THE  WYKEHAM  PRESS, 
WINCHESTER 


CONTENTS 


PAGE 

I.  THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY  ....  7 

Oliver  Elton. 

II.  MARLOWE’S  TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  DR. 

FAUSTUS . 20 

Percy  Simpson. 

III.  JOHNSON’S  IRENE . 35 

David  Nichol  Smith. 

IV.  CHARLOTTE  BRONTE . 54 

Janet  Spens. 

V.  TENNYSON  AND  WALES  ....  71 

Herbert  G.  Wright. 

VI.  AN  C RENE  WISSE  AND  HA  LI  MEIBHAD  .  104 

J.  R.  R.  Tolkien. 


8^939 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


I 

IN  every  art  or  craft  down  to  the  humblest  we  instinctively 
figure  the  procedure  as  a  struggle  with  something  that  is 
not  ourselves :  with  some  kind  of  ‘  matter  ’  that  resists  in 
different  ways  and  with  varying  tenacity.  The  desired  pro¬ 
duct  has  to  be  presented  to  one  or  more  of  the  senses  as  the 
mind  has  seen  it ;  the  vision  has  to  be  expressed,  and  expres¬ 
sion  means  communication.  Still,  I  agree  with  Professor 
Alexander 1  that  the  artist  ‘  does  not,  in  general,  first  form 
an  image  (if  he  be  a  poet,  say)  of  what  he  wants  to  express, 
but  finds  out  what  he  wanted  to  express  by  expressing  it  ’. 

This  is  more  especially  true  of  the  art  of  words ;  and  in  the 
present  essay  I  shall  keep  to  poetry,  and  for  the  most  part 
to  high  or  serious  poetry.  The  resistance  of  words  is  not  like 
that  of  stone  or  wood.  The  shaper  of  an  oar  or  of  a  boome¬ 
rang  must  have  a  clear  mental  picture  of  the  thing  before  he 
sets  to  work.  Formally  speaking,  his  task  is  one  of  subtrac¬ 
tion  ;  guided  by  the  pattern  in  his  head,  he  cuts  away  part  of 
the  wood,  which  resists  him  according  to  its  own  law.  The 
material  is  dead.  But  words  are  ‘  not  absolutely  dead  things  ’ ; 
words  have  a  stubborn  life  of  their  own.  They  are  irreducible  ; 
they  have  been  shaped,  for  the  most  part  unawares,  by  a 
million  dead  and  living  artificers ;  and  they  put  up  a  stiffer 
resistance  than  a  block.  On  the  other  hand,  they  have  begun 
to  do  our  work  for  us  already — if  only  we  can  find  them. 
But  where,  then,  are  they  ] 

The  carver  can  hardly  escape  the  fancy  that  his  oar  is 
really,  and  not  only  potentially,  in  the  block,  and  that  he 
is  merely,  as  it  were,  unpacking  it.  So,  too,  the  poet  is  sure 
that  the  mot  unique,  which  will  tell  him  what  he  is  trying  to 
mean,  exists  somewhere,  and  that  he  has  only  to  find  it,  or 

1  Artistic  Creation  and  Cosmic  Creation ,  p.  8  ( I'roceedinys  of  British 
Academy,  1928). 


8 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


(in  a  1  wise  passiveness  ’)  to  wait  for  it.  This  may  be  an 
illusion  ;  there  may  be  no  such  word  ;  and,  if  so,  there  is 
something  wrong  with  his  half-formed  conception.  But  if  it 
does  exist,  then  it  is  in  ‘  the  back  of  his  head  ’,  that  is,  in  the 
disorderly  stores  of  his  mental  dictionary.  These  stores  are 
much  smaller,  and  for  artistic  purposes  more  select,  than  the 
contents  of  the  Oxford  English  Dictionary.  But  externally, 
they  all  are,  or  ought  to  be,  in  that  treasure-house.  How 
much  smaller  is  the  poet’s  stock,  and  on  what  principle  is  it 
selected?  What  kinds  of  word,  to  be  found  in  the  O.E.D., 
offer  him  most  resistance,  and  in  what  varying  degrees  ? 
Well,  the  O.E.D.  itself  offers  certain  clues;  but  as  the  theme 
is  an  endless  one  I  can  only  suggest  headings. 

II 

In  the  preface  to  the  Dictionary  there  is  a  star-shaped 
diagram  (vol.  i,  p.  xvi),  made  to  represent  the  stable  and  the 
changing  elements  in  the  language.  In  the  midst  is  lingua 
communis,  the  body  of  words  in  general  use,  the  ‘  nucleus  or 
central  mass  of  many  thousand  words  whose  “  Anglicity  ”  is 
unquestioned  ’.  Above  is  the  term  ‘  literary  ’,  and  below  is 
‘  colloquial  ’,  sinking  down  into  *  slang  Various  rays  show 
the  perpetual  process  by  which  words  come  into  this  common 
stock,  and  either  stay  there,  or  go  out  again  into  limbo  more 
or  less  completely  :  foreign  words,  dialect  words,  scientific  and 
technical  words.  There  is  no  definite  1  quota  the  immigrants 
take  their  chances  of  making  a  living. 

This  scheme  may  be  filled  up  in  order  to  indicate  the 
resoui'ces,  or  temptations,  of  the  poet.  Keeping  the  central, 
or  common  language  (1)  with  its  upward  and  downward 
tendencies,  and  going  clockwise  from  the  top,  we  may  specify 
the  following  groups:  (2)  Biblical  words;  (3)  archaic;  (4) 
‘  poetic  diction  ’  in  the  narrower  sense  (with  two  subdivisions. 

(а)  Icennings  and  (b)  compound  words) ;  (5)  foreign  words ; 

(б)  dialect ;  (7)  slang  and  very  homely  words  ;  (8)  technical 
words ;  (9)  scientific ;  and  (10)  philosophical  (including  some 
theological)  terms,  which  bring  us  round  the  clock  again  into 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


9 


the  upper  regions  of  language.  It  is  plain  that  neighbouring 
groups  run  into  one  another,  and  that  there  are  many  cross 
lines  ;  and,  further,  that  some  groups  will  resist  the  poet  much 
more  than  others,  and  that  for  diverse  reasons.  His  success, 
naturally,  can  only  be  judged  by  the  event  ;  defeat  can  seldom 
be  predicted  as  a  matter  of  course  ;  and  there  are  few  taboos 
on  a  ‘priori  grounds.  The  present  sketch  must  be  severely 
limited,  and  certain  vital  matters  must  be  ruled  out.  One  of 
these  is  the  sound  of  words  (a  great  topic,  of  which  one 
chapter  would  deal  with  the  poetic  use  of  discords).  Every 
word,  from  the  poet’s  point  of  view,  has  three  aspects,  which 
can  be  separated,  if  only  for  analysis:  (a)  the  sound;  ( b )  the 
definition,  or  intellectual  content,  which  is  given  by  the  lexico¬ 
grapher  ;  and  (c)  the  associations,  or  aura,  to  which  the  poet 
and  his  hearers  are  alive.  Turn,  in  the  O.E.D.,  or  in  Johnson, 
from  the  masterly  definitions  to  the  examples,  and  it  is  plain 
how  little  of  (c)  can  be  comprehended  in  (b).  In  the  groups 
now  to  be  noticed  the  aura  is  sometimes  stronger  and  some¬ 
times  fainter  ;  and  the  fainter  it  is  the  greater  the  resistance 
that  the  poet  must  experience. 

Ill 

Another  limitation,  which  will  at  once  pi’ovoke  protest, 
must  be  observed  here  as  far  as  possible.  I  shall  keep  mostly 
to  vocabulary ,  or  single  words  ;  and  this,  it  will  be  truly  said, 
is  to  miss  out  most  of  the  poetry.  All,  of  course,  depends  on 
their  setting,  on  their  metrical  union  into  a  poetic  phrase. 
Like  Browning’s  musician,  the  poet  makes  out  of  three  sounds 
‘  not  a  fourth  sound,  but  a  star  ’.  Yet  this  very  fact  dispenses 
us  from  saying  too  much  about  no.  1,  the  central  speech.  lor 
here  all,  or  almost  all,  depends  on  the  setting.  We  know 
what  may  be  done  with  the  commonest  monosyllables: 

Long  is  the  way 

And  hard,  that  out  of  Hell  leads  up  to  light. 

Difficilis  a  see  nsus  :  this  ‘  sentiment  ’,  as  Addison  would  have 
called  it,  soars  above  the  speaker  and  occasion  and  becomes 
a  truth  universal.  It  owes  its  power,  in  point  of  form,  to  the 


10 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


commonness  of  the  words ;  to  the  two  grammatical  inver¬ 
sions,  the  first  of  them  enforced  by  a  metrical  inversion  that 
comes  late  in  the  line  and  is  thus  doubly  emphatic ;  to  the 
doubled  stress,  also  late,  in  ‘  leads  up  ’ ;  to  the  sudden  addi¬ 
tion,  or  sighed-out  after-thought,  ‘  and  hard  coming  after 
the  line-pause  ;  to  the  placing  of  ‘  Hell  and  ‘  light  ’,  which 
bear  all  the  weight.  But  this  kind  of  dissection  is  beyond 
my  text.  Happily  no  amount  of  it  can  spoil,  or  so  I  believe, 
the  effect.  In  any  case  the  lingua  communis  leaves  little  to 
be  said  about  vocabulary.  The  words  taken  singly  (except 
‘  Hell  ’)  would  not  much  arrest  attention. 

It  is  otherwise  with  the  remaining  groups,  2-10.  Most  of 
these  are  like  the  ‘  aliens  ’,  each  of  them  wearing  his  own 
dress,  whom  the  citizens,  says  Aristotle,  at  once  notice  in 
their  streets.  This  is  the  simile  that  he  uses  in  the  Rhetoric 
for  ‘  strange  ’  words.  Here  the  common  words,  the  citizens  in 
their  daily  garb,  provide  the  setting  and  the  contrast.  The 
effect  depends  upon  the  strangers  being  able  to  make  good 
their  presence  ;  contrast  must  end  in  harmony.  Poetry,  of 
course,  is  sown  all  over  with  the  failures,  with  experiments 
that  startle  and  leave  us  cold ;  but  I  will  touch  rather  on  the 
successes. 


IV 

(2)  Biblical  and  kindred  words.  Of  these,  for  similar 
reasons,  there  will  be  less  to  say.  They  are  the  fine  flower 
of  the  •  common  ’  speech,  and  therefore  few  of  them,  by  them¬ 
selves,  are  specially  arresting,  except  those  which  have  an 
exclusively  sacred  association.  It  is  rather  their  sustained 
use  that  gives  character  to  a  style.  The  words  that  stand 
out,  taken  singly,  are  either  suggestive  of  doctrine  ( oblation , 
sanctify,  elect  (noun),  and  atonement) ;  or,  like  'predestination 
(which  is  not  in  the  Bible),  they  belong  to  group  10,  or,  like 
manna ,  they  are  now  in  metaphorical  use,  but  easily  suggest 
the  Hebrew  story.  Or,  again,  they  are  practically  out  of  use 
and  have  to  be  learnt  ( ouches ,  cockatrice,  wimple).  That  is,  if 
used  at  all,  they  are 

(3)  Archaic  words.  For  these  the  poets  have  found  their 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


11 


chief  storehouse  iu  the  glossary  of  Spenser.  He,  as  we  know, 
besides  coining  on  his  own  account,  also  used  dialect  (No.  6). 
His  followers,  like  Giles  and  Phineas  Fletcher,  took  some  of 
his  vocabulary ;  and  the  later  race  of  imitators  did  the  same, 
so  that  his  language  in  their  hands  was  a  revived  archaism. 
In  the  Castle  of  Indolence,  with  its  ‘  soft-embodied  fays  ’  and 
‘  with  all  these  sounds  y-blent  it  is  often  as  beautiful  and 
successful  as  with  Spenser  himself.  But  here,  and  with  other 
Spenserians  like  Croxall  and  Shenstone  and  William  Thomp¬ 
son,  who  also  did  well,  the  virtue  lies  less  in  the  single  words, 
in  ‘  beautiful  things  made  new  ’,  than  in  the  general  tint  of 
the  language  and  in  the  echoed  music.  Spenser  himself  has 
the  good  word  of  great  poets  and  of  all  readers  for  his 
invention ;  his  '  no  language  ’  has,  I  have  remarked  else¬ 
where,  more  poetic  life  in  it  than  any  of  the  actual  dialects 
of  England.  The  felicity  of  his  old-new  words  needs  no 
praise;  but  his  moderation  in  the  use  of  them  is  less  often 
noticed.  In  a  catalogue  they  seem  numerous;  but  they  do 
not,  in  fact,  bulk  very  large  in  the  mass  of  his  verse,  at  least 
after  the  date  of  the  Shepherd’s  Calendar.  Spelling  apart, 
and  not  counting  the  slight  twist  given  to  certain  inflexions, 
these  strange  words  are  like  an  occasional  gleam  of  gold  or 
purple  in  the  pattern ;  or  like  precious  or  semi-precious 
stones  sparkling  here  and  there  from  the  inlay  of  an  Eastern 
tomb.  Sometimes  they  come  in  a  cluster ;  in  descriptions  of 
pageantry,  armour,  and  dress  Spenser  is  tempted  to  accumu¬ 
late  them.  The  effect  is  a  new  emphasis ;  and  the  loose, 
iterative  style  of  the  Faerie  Queene  is  for  the  moment  braced 
up.  Belphoebe  wears  a  silken  camus ,  besprinkled  with  golden 
aygulets ,  and 

Pur/led  upon  with  many  a  golden  plight. 

On  her  brows  sit  many  graces, 

Working  belgards,  and  amorous  retrate  ; 

And  she  wears 

gilden  buskins  of  costly  cordwaine, 

All  bard  with  golden  bendes,  which  were  entayld 
With  curious  antickes,  and  full  faire  aumayld. 


12 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


It  is  the  dress  of  a  masquer ;  some  of  these  words  failed  to 
stay,  or  to  stay  long,  even  in  poetry ;  but  the  picture  is  none 
the  worse  for  that.  An  instance,  thoroughly  Spenserian  in 
tone,  may  be  added  from  Thomas  Hardy : 

A  little  chamber,  then,  with  swan  and  dove 
Ranged  thickly,  and  engrailed  with  rare  device 
Of  reds  and  purples,  for  a  paradise. 

The  peculiar  idiom  of  William  Morris  is  to  be  found — apart, 
that  is,  from  his  perverse  Beowulf — chiefly  in  his  prose  stories ; 
and  there,  to  my  own  ear,  the  effect  is  harmonious  and  delight¬ 
ful.  The  language,  second  nature  to  the  writer,  soon  becomes 
so  to  the  hearer.  The  case  of  Chatterton,  with  his  many  'pre¬ 
tended,  and  often  incongruous,  archaisms,  is  a  special  one. 
To  value  them  aright  and  to  feel  his  genius,  it  is  best  to 
forget  all  philology  and  to  use  a  bare  glossary. 


V 

(4)  1  Poetic  diction  ’  in  the  restricted  sense.  It  must  be 
enough  to  refer  to  the  special  features  found  in  (a)  ‘  kennings  ’ 
and  (b)  compound  terms.  But  these  two  can  hardly  be 
separated,  seeing  that  the  kenning  is  often  a  compound  single 
word,  though  often  a  group  of  divided  words.  The  Old  Norse 
term  for  a  circumlocutory  word  or  phrase  is  a  convenient 
one  for  many  usages,  all  of  the  same  genus.  Such  are  the 
periphrases  in  Old  Norse  and  Old  English  verse ;  in  Milton 
and  his  imitators ;  in  Pope  and  his  imitators  ;  and  those  in 
Tennyson.  The  ‘swan-road’,  the  ‘ All-wielder ’,  ‘Pale-neb’ 
[vulture],  the  ‘  Sanctities  of  Heaven  ’,  the  ‘  speckled  fry  ’ 
[trout],  the  ‘  chalice  of  the  grapes  of  God  ’,  and  the  ‘  hard- 
grained  Muses  of  the  cube  and  square  ’,  all  aim  at  rousing 
the  fancy  ;  they  call  a  thing  not  by  its  name  but  in  a  manner 
which  at  once  describes  and  half-conceals  it.  They  are  in  the 
nature  of  easy  riddles.  The  Old  English  Riddles,  which  are 
whole  poems,  are  harder ;  but  the  principle  is  the  same.  In 
the  Old  Norse  ‘  court  poetry  ’  kennings  tend  to  become  dis¬ 
tressing  enigmas,  and  are  a  mark  of  decline.  In  our  eighteenth- 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


13 


century  jargon  (the  ‘  tinny  race  ’,  &c.)  the  poet’s  fancy  is  dead 
and  he  is  following  the  line  of  least  resistance— doing  the 
easiest  thing  he  can.1  But  kennings,  of  one  sort  or  another, 
are  deep  in  the  very  nature  of  poetry  and  of  all  impassioned 
speech.  They  can  be  designed  for  beauty  and  dignity ;  but 
then  they  must  not  be  obscure,  or  the  dignity  is  in  danger. 
In  Milton  they  are  used  majestically.  John  the  Baptist  is 
‘  the  great  Proclaimer  ’ ;  and  there  are  the  ‘  grand  infernal 
Peers’,  with  ‘Hell’s  dread  Emperor’,  their  ‘mighty  Para¬ 
mount  ’.  But  these  are  phrases,  not  single  words.  In  Old 
English  single  compound  words,  as  well  as  phrases,  are  of 
course  inherent  in  the  poetic  language.  Here  I  will  only 
refer  to  Professor  Wyld’s  paper  on  ‘  Diction  and  Imagery  in 
Anglo-Saxon  Poetry  ’,2  where  the  analogies  with  eighteenth- 
century  verse  are  brought  out,  and  which  throws  so  much 
light  on  the  artistic  problem ;  namely,  on  how  far  these 
expressions  were,  at  the  time  of  writing,  and  now  are,  alive. 
Many  became  mere  formulae  ;  but  the  total  effect,  beyond 
a  doubt,  is  one  of  great  beauty  and  expressiveness. 

As  for  the  compounds  in  our  later  poetry,  they  still  await 
an  equally  instructive  treatment  ;  they  are  matter  for  a  book. 
Naturally,  they  are  most  in  favour  with  our  concentrative 
poets,  such  as  Gray,  Keats,  and  Dante  Rossetti ;  although 
from  Shakespeare,  too,  especially  in  his  tragedies,  they  seem 
to  pour  out  spontaneously,  when  he  is  moved  to  be  elemental 
and  tremendous : 

You  sulphurous  and  thought-executing  fires, 
Vaunt-couriers  of  oak-cleaving  thunderbolts  .  .  . 

Of  the  slow  studious  writers,  Rossetti  seems  to  depend 
least  on  Miltonic  or  other  tradition,  and  to  experiment  most 
freely.  In  one  sonnet  of  the  House  of  Life  occur  cloud-control, 
moontrack,  Jire-tried  (vows),  and  still-seeded  (secret  of  the 

1  For  a  systematic  account  of  this  habit,  and  of  others  which  I  am  not 
attempting  to  discuss  (Latinism,  personification,  abstraction,  &c.),  see 
Dr.  Thomas  Quayle’s  work,  Poetic  Diction  (in  the  eighteenth  century), 
1924). 

1  Essays  and  Studies  of  the  English  Association,  1925,  vol.  xi. 


14 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


grove).  The  first  and  last  of  these  are  dubious  :  but  Rossetti 
has  many  splendid  examples,  as  in  the  line 

The  ground-whirl  of  the  perished  leaves  of  hope  ; 
and  again  : 

Close-kissed  and  eloquent  of  still  replies 

Thy  twilight-hidden  glimmering  visage  lies. 

Such  compounds  as  sun-glimpses,  involving  two  weighted 
syllables  together,  make  the  rhythm  slower  and  more  solemn  ; 
and  indeed  this  is  the  general  effect  of  poetic  compounds.  So 
with  Keats  : 

Like  hoarse  night-gusts  sepulchral  briers  among. 

And  it  follows  that  such  forms  encounter  the  check,  offered 
everywhere  in  English,  by  knots  of  consonants :  and  this  has 
either  to  be  eluded,  or  justified  by  the  purpose.  In  Keats’s 
line,  no  doubt,  the  rush  of  the  sibilants  answers  to  the  hiss 
of  the  wind. 

(5)  Little  need  be  said  of  foreign  words  not  yet  acclima¬ 
tized,  which  are  too  distracting  to  do  much  good  in  serious 
poetry.  They  chiefly  befit  middle  verse  of  the  humorous  or 
ironical  kind.  Dryden  took  his  risks  in  the  pleasant  line 

To  taste  the  fraischeur  of  the  summer  air. 

But  the  word  was  not  wanted  and  did  not  gain  a  footing. 
Thomas  Hardy  speaks  of  ‘  the  formal-faced  cohue  where 
‘  mob  ’,  or  ‘  throng  was  not  sufficiently  contemptuous.  But 
these  terms,  which  give  trouble  to  the  lexicographers,  have  to 
be  well  installed  in  the  language  before  they  can  serve  the 
imagination  aright. 

VI 

(6)  Dialect  words.  Here  is  matter  for  another  volume. 
Professor  George  Gordon 1  selects  some  twenty  such  words 
from  Shakespeare,  observing  that  ‘  most  of  them  are  rather 
forcible  than  pretty,  and  have  more  pith  and  village  realism 
than  poetry’.  Not  the  least  notable  is  the  thunderous  verb, 
in  King  Lear, 

Gallow  the  very  wanderers  of  the  dark. 

1  Shakespeare's  English,  Tract  no.  xxix,  S.P.  E.,  p.  269. 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONAKY 


15 


It  means  ‘  to  terrify  ’,  and  is  chosen  by  the  poet  to  terrify  us. 
These  aliens  have  a  different  franchise  from  Scots  or  Dorset 
or  Lincolnshire  words  scattered  in  a  regular  dialect  poem  ;  or, 
as  with  Burns  and  Fergusson,  in  one  written  in  the  Northern 
variety  of  the  national  speech.  Here,  of  course,  the  strangeness 
is  greater  for  the  Southern  reader  than  for  the  Scot ;  but  even 
the  Scot  has  to  learn  the  language.  The  Northern  words, 
forms,  and  sounds,  being  mostly  concerned  with  concrete 
things,  have  all  the  sap  and  colour  of  home-grown  fruits,  and 
are  not  properly  ‘  strange  ’  at  all.  Gentler  effects  are  produced 
by  Barnes ;  and  the  soft  Dorset  speech  is  used  to  perfection, 
though  more  sparsely,  by  Hardy  with  his  apple-blooth ,  and 
poppling  brew ,  and  leazes  lone. 


VII 

(7)  We  are  now  down  near  the  foot  of  the  clock,  with  slang 
and  its  congeners,  which  touch  dialect  on  one  side,  and  technical 
terms  (no.  8)  on  the  other.  These  last  are  trade-slang,  or 
trade-dialect,  and  I  pass  on  to  them,  as  slang  would  introduce 
the  large  subject  of  what  may  be  called  frontier-verse,  and  the 
lower  limits  of  the  poetic  vocabulary.  Ugly,  grotesque,  or 
gross  words,  I  will  only  remark,  may  be  made  clean  and 
presentable,  and  lifted  into  poetry  (as  we  see  in  Juvenal),  by 
indignation.  His  satires,  most  people  will  agree,  are  poetry. 
Mr.  Sludge  the  Medium,  though  it  contains  no  one  word  that 
is  ‘  taboo  ’,  is  below  the  line,  and  there  is  only  a  scrap  or  two 
of  poetry  in  it.  We  can  only  decide  here  by  net  impressions, 
and  single  words  count  for  little. 

(8)  As  to  technical  words,  they  are  stubborn  things,  because 
the  bare  meaning  is  everything  and  is  usually  concrete  and 
prosaic.  The  aura  is  not  there  already,  and  the  poet  has  to 
make  it.  The  thing  can  be  done ;  M‘Andrew  has  done  it. 
His  engine  is  to  him  a  poem  that  illustrates  the  works  of  the 
Lord  and  the  reign  of  law : 

From  coupler-flange  to  spindle-guide  I  see  Thy  Hand,  0  God. 

This  is  poetry  of  a  kind,  and  I  will  not  quote  instances  where 


16 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


the  effect  is  overdone.  Still,  these  effects  are  not  normal  in 
highly  pitched  verse. 

Shakespeare’s  notorious  use  of  law-terms  in  impassioned 
speech  is  harder  to  judge.  They  must  have  had  more  colour 
and  feeling  in  them  for  him  than  we  can  detect ;  although,  no 
doubt,  they  are  one  species  of  the  ‘quibbles’  that  Johnson 
condemned.  Romeo’s  sentence, 

seal  with  a  righteous  kiss 
A  dateless  bargain  to  engrossing  death 

is  a  really  bad  quibble.  And  how  many  of  the  thousand 
lovers  who  have  repeated  the  line 

My  bonds  in  thee  are  all  determinate 

have  been  checked  by  the  legal  image  ?  Probably  very  few. 
Shakespeare  is  like  the  Bible  ;  we  know  him  so  well  that  we 
do  not  notice  difficulties. 


VIII 

But  such  terms  border  on  (9)  Scientific  vocabulary.  Milton 
enlists  more  hard  words  of  this  kind  than  any  other  great 
English  poet.  Some  of  them  check  every  reader,  and  have  to 
be  learned  :  colure,  cycle,  epicycle,  thwart,  obliquities.  They 
belong  to  the  extinct  astronomy,  with  its  astrological  implica¬ 
tions.  These,  indeed,  survived  it,  and  are  now  perceptible  in 
‘lucky  star’  and  such  expressions:  and  horoscopes  die  hard. 
Predominant  and  influence  remain  as  metaphors,  or  abstracts, 
with  very  little  physical  suggestion.  They  are  a  section  of  the 
very  large  class  discussed  by  Miss  Elizabeth  Holmes  in  her 
article1  on  ‘Milton’s  Use  of  Words’.  The  words  in  question, 
mostly  of  Latin  origin,  retained  for  Milton,  and  often  for  his 
contemporaries,  an  aura  of  their  original,  physical  meanings : 
and  this  we  must  recover,  if  we  are  to  appreciate  them.  He 
brought  out,  or  brought  back,  their  latent  appeal  to  the 
senses.  How  Young,  Thomson,  and  others  echoed  Milton  in 
this  matter  and  usually  came  to  grief,  is  an  old  story.  A 
different  and  very  adroit  use  of  technical  and  scientific  terms 

1  Essays  and  Studies  of  the  English  Association,  1924,  vol.  x. 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


17 


is  found  in  Tennyson’s  Princess.  He  wrote  at  a  moment 
when  the  common  language  was  being  enriched  by  the  new 
science,  in  a  degree  not  to  be  paralleled  since  Renaissance 
times.  Telegraph  and  parachute  and  catalepsy  still  spoke  to 
the  fancy,  and  Tennyson  scatters  them  in  his  fanciful  verse. 
Geology,  too,  was  coming  home  to  the  popular  mind :  and  he 
picks  out,  for  the  sake  of  their  sound  and  strangeness, 

rag  and  trap  and  tuff, 

Amygdaloid  and  trachyte. 

IX 

(10)  Philosophical  and  kindred  words.  As  we  know,  some 
of  the  masters,  Plato  and  Berkeley  and  Hume  (being  also 
men  of  letters),  can  write,  and  often  do  write,  with  very  little 
stiff’  terminology.  They  are  all  the  more  elusive,  perhaps, 
for  that  reason  :  but  they  make  everything  seem  easy.  The 
poets  who  try  to  expound  abstract  ideas  and  to  inlay  scholastic 
terms  meet  with  a  very  palpable  resistance  from  language. 
Many  such  terms,  of  course,  have  no  association  with  the 
senses,  or  fringe  of  imagery.  The  -ologies  are  out  of  the 
question,  like  logic  and  ethics.  Has  the  noun  complex  yet 
reared  its  horrid  head  in  a  modern  lyric  1  Probably.  It 
belongs  to  our  No.  7,  slang.  But  there  are  poets  who  can 
philosophize  without  danger.  Spenser,  in  his  Hymn  of  Love , 
and  Hymn  of  Beauty,  steers  his  bark  wonderfully  ;  and  even  in 
his  ‘  trinal  triplicities  on  high  ’  (the  nine  orders  of  subordinate 
heavenly  beings)  he  does  not  go  aground.  But  the  great 
performer  in  this  region  is  Lucretius  ;  and  he  is  the  harder 
pressed,  because  he  is  expounding  physics,  where  the  terms 
have  strict  senses  and  sharp  edges :  plenum,  inane,  primordia 
rerum.  How  Lucretius,  when  he  is  stirred,  can  make  these 
words  glow,  needs  no  description.  One  of  his  greatest  effects 
is  produced  by  a  word  from  the  Greek,  which  the  poverty  of 
Latin,  so  he  tells  us,  forces  him  to  borrow  although  the  meaning 
is  easy  to  explain.  It  is  the  theory  that  every  object  consists 
of  tiny  particles  of  its  own  shape  and  kind : 

Nunc  et  Anaxagorae  scrutemur  homoeomerian. 

B 


2339*14 


18 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


Theological  terms  often  have  a  very  rigid  sense  :  essence, 
attribute,  necessity ,  foreknowledge,  coeternal.  But  they  can 
serve  poetry,  because  their  associations,  religious,  historical, 
and  imaginative  are  manifold.  The  Athanasian  Creed  has 
made  some  of  them  familiar.  Milton  does  not  shrink  from 
them,  and  is  often  nobly  justified.  Light  is 

Bright  effluence  of  bright  essence  increate  ; 
and  the  line 

Fixed  fate,  freewill,  foreknowledge  absolute 

is  an  example  of  great  poetry  that  is  wholly  destitute  of 
imagery  and  lives  on  its  intellectual  evocations.  Yet,  as 
though  Milton  felt  the  danger,  in  the  next  line  he  brings  the 
idea  down  to  earth — perhaps  to  the  Cretan  labyrinth1? 

And  found  no  end,  in  wandering  mazes  lost. 

Another  of  these  tough  words  is  predestination.  Magnificent 
in  sound,  and  sinister  in  meaning,  it  is  nevertheless  hard  to 
animate  in  verse.  Milton,  in  one  of  his  dogmatic  passages, 
hardly  succeeds  : 

As  if  predestination  overruled 
Their  will,  disposed  by  absolute  decree 
Or  high  foreknowledge. 

But  M'Andrew,  I  believe,  succeeds  once  more,  though  it  be  by 
violence : 

Predestination  in  the  stride  o’  yon  connectin’-rod. 

This,  again,  is  a  feat :  it  is  verse,  with  a  ring  of  poetry.  On 
the  whole,  the  English  writers  like  Spenser,  or  his  follower 
Sir  John  Davies  in  Nosce  Teipsum,  have  prevailed  rather  by 
shunning  than  by  challenging  the  diction  of  the  schools. 

X 

Can  we  now  grade  these  diverse  groups  of  words  in  the 
measure  of  their  reluctance  to  become  poetical  ?  Leaving  out 
slang  and  the  like,  and  also  the  half-English  foreign  importa¬ 
tions,  which  scarcely  count,  the  result  seems  to  be  this. 
Technical  words  are  by  no  means  quite  intractable,  but  have 


THE  POET’S  DICTIONARY 


19 


less  aura  than  the  rest.  Scientific  words,  in  the  past  at  any 
rate,  have  had  more,  especially  at  the  two  great  seasons  of 
their  immigration,  the  Renaissance  and  the  age  of  Darwin. 
Some  philosophical  and  theological  terms,  in  spite  of  their 
stubborn  intellectual  content  and  natural  bareness,  have  rich 
associations  for  the  poet,  if  only  he  can  partially  submerge 
that  content  and  make  play  with  the  undefined  element. 
Kennings  and  single-word  compounds  are  inherent  in  the 
poetic  language  ;  they  often  betray  their  date,  and  may  easily 
be  a  bad  symptom  ;  but  they  are  never  far  off,  and  at  their 
best  they  may  almost  be  poems  in  themselves — the  shortest 
poems  possible.  Archaic  words,  though  not  thus  inherent  in 
poetic  language,  are  triumphantly  managed  by  a  very  few 
masters.  Biblical  words  and  the  lingua  comynun is  generally, 
especially  in  its  higher  ranges,  need  offer  no  resistance  at  all ; 
and  depend,  therefore,  more  than  all  the  rest,  on  their  neigh¬ 
bours,  their  order,  and  their  metrical  value.  The  poet,  and 
perhaps  every  reader,  may  know  all  this  without  being  told  ; 
but  analysis  never  does  any  harm  to  our  understanding,  or  to 
our  enjoyment,  of  poetry.  Oliver  Elton. 


MARLOWE’S  TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF 


DOCTOR  FATJSTUS ' 

IN  March.  ]  581,  a  brilliant  undergraduate  went  into  residence 
at  Benet  College,  Cambridge.  He  came  up  from  the  King’s 
School,  Canterbury,  with  a  scholarship  on  the  Parker  founda¬ 
tion,  which  required  the  holder,  on  completing  his  University 
career,  to  enter  the  Church.  He  took  his  degree  and  kept  his 
terms  during  the  six  years’  tenure  of  the  scholarship,  and 
proceeded  master  of  arts  in  1587.  Then  just  at  the  date  when 
he  should  have  rounded  off  this  eminently  respectable  career 
with  the  style  and  title  of  ‘  the  reverend  Christopher  Marlowe  ’ 
and  the  prospect  of  a  college  living  in  later  life,  the  authorities 
at  Cambridge  and  at  Canterbury  must  have  heard  with  deep 
pain  that  their  promising  young  scholar  was  following  a  very 
different  lure  and  had  decided  that  his  gifts  of  literary 
expression  would  find  freer  scope  on  the  stage  than  in  the 
pulpit.  He  was  producing  a  play  called  Tamburlaine  the 
Great ,  original  alike  in  form  and  in  conception  and  destined 
to  be  much  more  than  a  contemporary  success  :  it  stands  out 
for  all  time  as  one  of  the  landmarks  of  English  drama. 

The  type  of  character  depicted  in  Tamburlaine  recurs  in 
Doctor  Faustus,  but  in  a  text  so  corrupted  and  overlaid  by  the 
work  of  other  writers,  mere  playhouse  hacks,  that  in  only 
a  fragment  of  the  whole  can  we  trace  with  certainty  the  hand 
of  Marlowe.  We  shall  discern  more  clearly  the  scope  and 
intention  of  Doctor  Faustus  if  we  glance  for  a  moment  at 
some  characteristic  features  of  the  earlier  play. 

Tamburlaine  is  essentially  the  work  of  a  young  man, 
touched  with  a  note  of  youthful  idealism  which  he  never 

1  A  Lecture  deiivered  before  the  Association  in  London  on  9  December, 
1924.  For  the  textual  problem  raised  in  tbe  course  of  the  lecture,  readers 
are  referred  to  the  writer’s  paper  on  the  1604  Quarto  contributed  to 
volume  vii  of  the  Association’s  Essays  and  Studies. 


MARLOWE’S  TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  Lit.  FAUSTUS  21 

recaptured  in  his  later  writing ;  it  has  something  of  the  heroic 
quality  of  Tamburlaine  himself — 

Of  stature  tall  and  straightly  fashioned, 

Like  his  desire,  lift  upwards  and  divine.1 
Writing  in  this  exalted  mood,  Marlowe  gave  a  new  turn  to 
tragedy.  He  concentrated  all  his  creative  power  on  one 
towering  and  colossal  figure,  round  which  the  other  characters 
revolve  like  satellites  in  the  orbit  of  a  planet.  The  hero  is 
the  incarnation  of  unbridled  power,  pitiless  in  the  quest  of  it 
and  achieving  his  aim  with  superhuman  energy,  but  idealized 
by  the  soaring  imagination  of  the  poet.  Marlow  varies  the 
tones  of  his  instrument,  but  the  louder  notes  prevail.  Yet 
always,  whether  expressed  in  gorgeous  rhetoric  or  in  pure 
poetry,  the  note  of  aspiration  is  sustained. 

Is  it  not  passing  brave  to  be  a  king, 

And  ride  in  triumph  through  Persepolis  ? 2 
And  the  clear,  ringing  music  of  that  last  line  so  caught  the 
poet’s  ear  that  he  repeated  it  as  a  refrain,  making  blank  verse 
lyrical.  It  is  followed  by  Tamburlaine’s  scornful  question, 

Why  then,  Casane,  should  we  wish  for  aught 
The  world  affords  in  greatest  novelty 
And  rest  attemptless,  faint,  and  destitute  ? 3 
Tamburlaine  in  this  poetic  mood  even  expounds  the  philosophy 
of  ambition  : 

Nature,  that  framed  us  of  four  elements 
Warring  within  our  breast  for  regiment, 

Doth  teach  us  all  to  have  aspiring  minds. 

Our  souls,  whose  faculties  can  comprehend 
The  wondrous  architecture  of  the  world 
And  measure  every  wandering  planet’s  course, 

Still  climbing  after  knowledge  infinite 
And  always  moving  as  the  restless  spheres, 

Will  us  to  wear  ourselves  and  never  rest, 

Until  we  reach  the  ripest  fruit  of  all, 

That  perfect  bliss  and  sole  felicity, 

The  sweet  fruition  of  an  earthly  crown.4 

1  Tamburlaine,  Part  I,  11.  461-2,  in  the  Oxford  edition  of  Marlowe  by 
C.  F.  Tucker  Brooke,  which  is  quoted  in  future  references. 

2  758-9.  3  777-9.  4  869-80. 


22 


MARLOWE’S 


‘  Still  climbing  after  knowledge  infinite  ’ — the  words  are  note¬ 
worthy  as  anticipating  the  theme  of  Doctor  Faustus,  which 
probably  followed  closely  on  the  second  part  of  Tamburlaine ; 
Marlowe  seems  half-consciously  to  be  moving  towards  the 
conception  of  his  second  play.  The  quest  of  infinite  know¬ 
ledge  is  a  new  phase  of  ambition,  and  he  gives  it  kindred 
treatment.  There  is  little  appreciable  advance  in  dramatic 
method.  Marlowe  had  not  yet  felt  his  way  to  a  well-knit  and 
coherent  plot.  All  the  action  centres  in  a  single  character 
absorbed  by  a  passion  which  consumes  him.  Both  Tambur¬ 
laine  and  Faustus,  it  may  be  noted,  are  men  of  low  origin. 
Tamburlaine  is  a  shepherd  : 

I  am  a  lord,  for  so  my  deeds  shall  prove, 

And  yet  a  shepherd  by  my  parentage.1 

Of  Faustus  we  are  told  at  once  in  the  prologue  that  his 
parents  were  ‘  base  of  stock  High  intellectual  gifts  and 
a  boundless  energy  carry  them  to  their  goal.  The  conception 
is  suggestive  as  coming  from  the  son  of  a  Canterbury  shoe¬ 
maker. 

But  if  the  method  of  the  play  of  Doctor  Faustus  is  un¬ 
changed,  the  material  is  better  suited  for  dramatic  handling. 
Tamburlaine  throughout  is  rhetorical  and  spectacular ;  it  is 
not  so  much  a  drama  as  a  pageant — the  triumphal  pageant 
of  ambition,  impressive  indeed  by  the  sheer  glory  of  the 
verse,  but  so  monotonous  in  treatment  that  the  two  parts 
really  make  up  a  cumbrous  ten-act  play.  In  Doctor  Faustus 
much  of  Marlowe’s  original  writing  has  been  pared  down  by 
successive  playhouse  editors  in  order  to  add  to  the  clownery, 
but  the  main  design  is  clear,  it  is  boldly  carried  out,  and  the 
theme  has  great  dramatic  possibilities.  The  play  is  some¬ 
thing  more  than  a  variant  of  the  type  depicted  in  Tambur¬ 
laine  :  it  is  not  a  mere  study  of  ambition ;  it  depicts  the 
tragedy  of  a  human  soul,  and  in  the  closing  scene  it  achieves 
this  end  with  a  strength  and  intensity  as  yet  unknown  in 
English  drama. 

It  is  this  sense  of  the  inner  conflict  which  makes  Doctor 

1  230-1. 


TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  DR.  FAUSTUS 


23 


Faustus  what  the  title-page  of  the  early  editions  expressly 
calls  it,  a  1  Tragical  History  Faustus  is  depicted  in  the 
opening  scene  among  his  books,  turning  them  over  ir¬ 
resolutely,  undecided  to  what  study  to  devote  himself.  When 
Valdes  advises  him  to  enter  upon  the  study  of  necromancy, 
he  notes  that  weakness  and  promises  success  on  one  con¬ 
dition — 

If  learned  Faustus  will  be  resolute.1 

Faustus  protests  his  resolution,  but  it  is  noticeable  that, 
when  his  mind  is  made  up  and  he  enters  to  conjure  after 
being  instructed  in  the  ritual,  he  has  to  reassure  himself  : 

Then  fear  not,  Faustus,  but  be  resolute, 

And  try  the  uttermost  magic  can  perform.2 

His  spirit  ebbs  and  flows  like  the  tide.  In  the  first  flush  of 
his  success  he  utters  the  exultant  cry, 

Had  I  as  many  souls  as  there  be  stars, 

I’d  give  them  all  for  Mephistophilis.3 

But  when  he  has  time  to  reflect,  he  is  cowed  with  hopeless 
doubt : 

Now,  Faustus,  must  thou  needs  be  damned, 

And  canst  thou  not  be  saved  ? 

What  boots  it  then  to  think  of  God  or  heaven  ? 

Away  with  such  vain  fancies,  and  despair — 

Despair  in  God,  and  trust  in  Belsabub. 

Nay,  go  not  backward  :  no,  Faustus,  be  resolute. 

Why  waverest  thou  ?  0  something  soundeth  in  mine  ears, 

‘Abjure  this  magic,  turn  to  God  again  ’.4 

It  is  this  anguish  of  uncertainty  that  strikes  the  note  of 
tragedy  in  the  play.  It  is  a  venture  into  an  uncharted 
region  which  only  Shakespeare  was  to  explore  thoroughly  : 
these  faint  tracks  of  the  pioneer  point  the  way  to  Hamlet. 

As  the  play  proceeds,  the  struggle  deepens  in  intensity. 

When  I  behold  the  heavens,  then  I  repent,0 

Faustus  exclaims  at  one  moment,  and  at  the  next : 

1  Dr.  Faustus,  162.  '  248-9.  s  338-9. 

1  433-40. 


5  612. 


24 


MARLOWE’S 


My  heart’s  so  hardened  I  cannot  repent : 

Scarce  can  I  name  salvation,  faith,  or  heaven, 

But  fearful  echoes  thunder  in  mine  ears 
‘  Faustus,  thou  art  damned  V 

The  sensual  baits  with  which  Mephistophilis  plies  his  victim 
are  subtly  graded ;  they  give  an  element  of  artistic  relief  to 
the  phases  of  suffering  and  despair.  The  first  attempt  is 
quite  crude : — 1  Enter  [Mephistophilis]  with  devils  giving 
crowns  and  rich  apparel  to  Faustus,  and  dance,  and  then 
depart  ’.2  Something  has  been  excised  from  the  context — at 
least  a  speech  of  the  presenter.  Marlowe,  with  all  the  rich 
resoui'ces  of  blank  verse  at  his  command,  did  not  dismiss 
a  temptation  with  a  dumb  show  and  eke  it  out  with  a  line  or 
two  of  prose  cut  up  into  verse  lengths. 

4  Speak,  Mephistophilis,  what  means  this  show  ?  ’ 

‘  Nothing,  Faustus,  but  to  delight  thy  mind  withal, 

And  to  show  thee  what  magic  can  perform.’3 

We  are  on  firmer  ground  in  the  next  temptation  which 
depicts  the  thrill  of  intellectual  pleasure. 

Have  I  not  made  blind  Homer  sing  to  me 
Of  Alexander’s  love  and  Oenon’s  death  ? 

And  hath  not  he  that  built  the  walls  of  Thebes 
With  ravishing  sound  of  his  melodious  harp 
Made  music  with  my  Mephistophilis?4 

Next  come  the  spectacle  of  the  Seven  Deadly  Sins,  signifi¬ 
cant  in  the  choice  of  the  performers,  and  the  visit  to  Rome. 
And  throughout,  like  a  mournful  undertone,  come  reminders 
of  the  approaching  end  : 

Now,  Mephistophilis,  the  restless  course 
That  time  doth  run  with  calm  and  silent  foot, 
Shortening  my  days  and  thread  of  vital  life, 

Calls  for  the  payment  of  my  latest  years.5 

Then,  as  the  climax  of  temptation  and  the  final  triumph  of 
the  Fiend,  is  the  summoning  up  to  earth  of  Helen  of  Troy. 
The  rapture  of  the  lost  man  finds  utterance  in  some  of  the 


1  629-32. 
4  637-41. 


2  After  514. 
6  1106-9. 


3  515-17. 


TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  HR.  FAUSTUS  25 

most  exquisite  lines  that  ever  came  from  the  pen  of 
Marlowe : 

Was  this  the  face  that  launched  a  thousand  ships 
And  burned  the  topless  towers  of  Ilium  ?  .  .  .  . 

Oh  thou  art  fairer  than  the  evening  air 
Clad  in  the  beauty  of  a  thousand  stars  ; 

Brighter  art  thou  than  flaming  Jupiter 
When  he  appeared  to  hapless  Semele, 

More  lovely  than  the  monarch  of  the  sky 
In  wanton  Arethusa’s  azured  arms  ; 

And  none  but  thou  shalt  be  my  paramour.1 

Instantly  this  radiant  vision  fades,  and  he  passes  to  the 
darkness  of  the  end.  The  last  scene  reveals  a  flexibility  of 
style,  a  capacity  for  varying  the  range  of  the  instrument,  for 
which  we  look  in  vain  in  the  clanging  verse  of  Tamburlaine. 
It  is  a  noteworthy  advance  in  poetic  art.  The  scene  opens 
significantly  with  a  dialogue  in  prose.  V ery  little  of  the 
prose  which  has  come  down  to  us  as  Marlowe’s  can  be 
regarded  as  unquestionably  his,  but  here  at  any  rate  I  feel  no 
hesitation,  and  the  point  is  important  in  view  of  Shake¬ 
speare’s  practice  later.  Marlowe,  reaching  the  crisis  of  his 
play,  pitches  the  first  note  in  this  quiet  key.2  Faustus 
enters  with  three  scholars,  who  had  been  students  with  him  at 
Wittenberg ;  one  of  them  a  close  intimate,  who  had  been  his 
chamber-fellow.  Old  memories  stir  within  him  at  the  sight 
of  them  and  effect  a  startling  change  :  the  world  magician, 
face  to  face  with  grim  reality,  becomes  profoundly  simple. 
He  turns,  as  any  common  man  would  turn,  to  his  fellow  men 
for  sympathy.  ‘  Ah  my  sweet  chamber-fellow  !  had  I  lived 
with  thee,  then  had  I  lived  still,  but  now  I  die,  eternally  : 
look,  comes  he  not  ?  Comes  he  not  ?  ’  They  try  to  comfort 
him  2  ‘  ’Tis  but  a  surfeit — never  fear,  man.’  ‘  A  surfeit  of 

deadly  sin  ’,  he  answers,  ‘  that  hath  damned  both  body  and 
soul.’  He  is  advised  to  look  up  to  heaven  and  trust  God’s 
infinite  mercy.  ‘  But  Faustus’  offence  can  ne’er  be  pardoned. 
The  serpent  that  tempted  Eve  may  be  saved,  but  not 
Faustus.’  His  mind  then  travels  back  to  his  past  life  and 


1  1328-9,  1341-7. 


2  1359 ff. 


26 


MARLOWE’S 


the  use  which  he  has  made  of  it.  ‘  Though  my  heart  pants 
and  quivers  to  remember  that  I  have  been  a  student  here 
these  thirty  years,  oh,  would  I  had  never  seen  Wertenberg, 
never  read  book :  and  what  wonders  I  have  done,  all 
Germany  can  witness,  yea,  all  the  world,  for  which  Faustus 
hath  lost  both  Germany,  and  the  world — yea,  heaven  itself, — 
heaven,  the  seat  of  God,  the  throne  of  the  blessed,  the 
kingdom  of  joy,  and  must  remain  in  hell  for  ever, — hell,  ah 
hell  for  ever?  Sweet  friends,  what  shall  become  of  Faustus, 
being  in  hell  for  ever  ?  ’  ‘Yet,  Faustus,  call  on  God.’  ‘  On  God, 
whom  Faustus  hath  abjured, — on  God,  whom  Faustus  hath 
blasphemed !  Ah,  my  God,  I  would  weep,  but  the  Devil 
draws  in  my  tears.  Gush  forth  blood  instead  of  tears — yea, 
life  and  soul !  Oh  he  stays  my  tongue,  I  would  lift  up  my 
hands,  but  see,  they  hold  them,  they  hold  them  !  ’ 

The  prose  is  strong  and  vivid,  and  it  is  heightened  by  a 
plangent  note  which  makes  it  a  tit  prelude  for  the  verse 
which  follows.  Faustus  is  left  alone,  with  but  one  hour  to 
live,  and  the  conflict  of  feeling  within  him  shows  itself  now 
by  a  direct  and  simple  line  wrung  from  him  by  the  im¬ 
minent  horror  of  the  end,  and  again  by  a  sudden  flight  of 
poetic  fancy,  the  expression  of  his  over-charged  emotion : 

Ah  Faustus, 

Now  hast  thou  but  one  bare  hour  to  live, 

And  then  thou  must  be  damned,  perpetually. 

Stand  still,  you  ever-moving  spheres  of  heaven, 

That  time  may  cease,  and  midnight  never  come. 

He  prays  that  this  final  hour  may  be  but 

A  year,  a  month,  a  week,  a  natural  day, 

That  Faustus  may  repent,  and  save  his  soul. 

0  lente,  lente  currite  noctis  equi.1 

Here  too  his  mind  goes  back  to  the  past ;  he  is  quoting  Ovid, 
the  prayer  of  a  lover  in  his  mistress’s  arms  that  the  horses  of 
the  chariot  of  the  night  may  move  slowly  across  the  sky. 
There  is  a  grim  irony  in  the  application  of  it  here ;  it  is 
the  agonized  cry  of  the  sensualist  who  had  claimed  Helen  for 
his  paramour. 


1  1426-8. 


27 


TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  DR.  FAUST  US 

Dream  quickly  gives  way  to  reality,  and  the  verse  vividly 
reflects  the  change.  First, there  is  a  line  of  monosyllables  broken 
by  quiet  pauses  ;  then  the  pent-up  agony  finds  expression, 
in  turbid  and  broken  rhythms.  Nowhere  in  the  whole  range 
of  Marlowe’s  work  is  there  a  sharper  contrast  to  the  normal 
movement  of  his  lines.  The  superb  imaginative  power  of  the 
passage  further  deepens  its  artistic  significance.  A  mirage  of 
blood — the  blood  of  Christ,  as  Faustus  supposes — flickers 
before  his  straining  eyes  : 

The  stars  move  still,  time  runs,  the  clock  will  strike, 

The  devil  will  come,  and  Faustus  must  be  damned. 

Oh  I’ll  leap  up  to  my  God  :  who  pulls  me  down  ? 

See,  see  where  Christ’s  blood  streams  in  the  firmament: 

One  drop  would  save  my  soul — half  a  drop — ah  my  Christ ! 

Ah,  rend  not  my  heart  for  naming  of  my  Christ : 

Yet  will  I  call  on  him — oh  spare  me,  Lucifer  ! 1 

There  is  a  rapid  change  of  vision.  He  sees  God  frowning 
angrily  upon  him ;  and  now  he  quotes,  not  Ovid,  but  the 
Bible  : 

Mountains  and  hills,  come,  come  and  fall  on  me, 

And  hide  me  from  the  heavy  wrath  of  God.2 

The  half-hour  strikes:  spent  with  agony,  he  pleads  for  a 
respite  ;  the  voice  dies  away  into  a  moan. 

Oh  God, 

If  thou  wilt  not  have  mercy  on  my  soul, 

Yet  for  Christ’s  sake,  whose  blood  hath  ransomed  me, 

Impose  some  end  to  my  incessant  pain.3 

In  this  last  interval  his  mind  wanders  off  to  a  fanciful  specu¬ 
lation  about  the  Pythagorean  doctrine  of  metempsychosis. 
In  our  ears  this  has  a  hollow  ring  at  such  a  moment ;  but  we 
must  remember  that  Faustus  is  a  supreme  embodiment  of 
Renaissance  feeling,  and  that  in  this  point  he  faithfully 
reflects  the  spirit  of  his  creator.  He  is  pouring  out  the 
curses  of  despair  when  midnight  strikes  ;  and  as  the  thunder 
peals  and  the  lightning  flashes  around  him,  one  last  gleam  of 
poetry  lights  up  his  dying  utterance  : 


1  1429-35. 


2  1438-9. 


3  1452-5. 


28 


MARLOWE’S 


O  soul,  be  changed  into  little  water-drops, 

And  fall  into  the  ocean,  ne’er  be  found.1 

The  fiends  rush  in  upon  their  prey,  and  he  passes  from  human 
view  with  a  sharp  convulsive  wail  hideous  in  its  realism : 

My  God,  my  God,  look  not  so  fierce  on  me  ! 

Adders  and  serpents,  let  me  breathe  a  while  ! 

Ugly  hell,  gape  not !  Come  not,  Lucifer ! 

I'll  burn  my  books — ah  Mephistophilis  ! 2 

But  the  artist  in  Marlowe  shrank  from  closing  the  tragedy 
on  that  wild  shriek  of  pain.  The  Chorus  enters  and  in  soft 
tones  speaks  the  dead  scholar’s  epitaph  : 

Cut  is  the  branch  that  might  have  grown  full  straight, 

And  burned  is  Apollo’s  laurel  bough.3 

The  last  sound  in  our  ears  is  the  note  of  pure  poetry. 

The  greatness  of  this  closing  scene  may  perhaps  be  recog¬ 
nized  more  clearly  by  briefly  examining  the  attempts  to 
amplify  it  in  a  later  playhouse  version.  I  have  quoted 
throughout  from  the  earliest  extant  text,  the  quarto  of  1604. 
But  a  much  fuller  version  was  published  in  1610.  This  is 
sometimes  very  helpful  in  supplying  lines  which  have  dropped 
out  of  the  carelessly  printed  text  of  its  predecessor.  But  it  is 
heavily  interpolated,  and  its  alterations  at  the  crisis  of  the 
play  are  very  instructive.  In  the  first  place  the  censor  was 
at  work :  he  is  an  offensive  creature  at  all  times,  but  he  is  at 
his  worst  when  he  hunts  a  religious  trail.  He  excised  the 
great  imaginative  line, 

See,  see  where  Christ’s  blood  streams  in  the  firmament. 

He  disapproved  of  the  poignant  appeal, 

O  God, 

If  thou  wilt  not  have  mercy  on  my  soul. 

The  theology  is  quite  harmless  in  his  resetting  of  it, 

Oh  if  my  soul  must  suffer  for  my  sin. 

In  Faustus’  final  appeal,  ‘Oh  mercy,  heaven  !’  is  substituted 
for  ‘  My  God,  my  God  ’  in  the  line 

My  God,  my  God,  look  not  so  fierce  on  me  ! 


1  1472-3. 


2  1474-7. 


3 


1478-9. 


TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  DR.  FAUSTUS  29 

In  fact  the  good  man  was  at  pains  to  keep  the  deity  out  of 
this  questionable  business  as  far  as  possible. 

Next  he  devoted  himself  to  touching  up  Marlowe’s  de¬ 
fective  metre. 

One  drop  would  save  my  soul — half  a  drop  ! — ah  my  Christ ! 
This  kind  of  thing,  he  felt,  must  be  made  into  blank  verse : 
he  made  it,  thus — 

One  drop  of  blood  would  save  me,  O  my  Christ ! 

In  the  line 

O  soul,  be  changed  into  little  water-drops, 
the  slight  hurry  of  the  rhythm  at  the  end  of  the  line  suggests 
the  movement  of  the  shower  of  falling  drops.  The  1616 
quarto  reads 

O  soul,  be  changed  into  small  water-drops  ! 

But  the  supreme  effort  of  the  interpolator  was  to  add  two 
scenes.  In  the  original  text  the  last  persons  to  talk  with 
Faustus  were  his  friends,  the  three  scholars;  they  retired  into 
another  room  to  pray  for  him.1  One  would  have  thought 
that,  after  the  tremendous  climax  of  his  passing,  no  human 
being  could  have  felt  the  slightest  interest  in  following  these 
minor  characters  any  further.  Faustus’  dismissal  of  them 
had  dramatic  point :  it  was,  for  him,  the  snapping  of  all 
human  ties.  But  the  reviser  brought  them  in  at  the  death, 
with  the  fatuous  remark  that  they  had  had  the  worst  night 

Since  first  the  world’s  creation  did  begin.2 
Thereupon  one  of  their  number  discovers  Faustus’  limbs 
scattered  in  fragments  about  the  floor. 

The  treatment  of  Mephistophilis  is  even  worse.  In  the 
original  his  last  and  crowning  temptation,  which  proves 
completely  successful,  is  to  master  Faustus  with  the  lure  of 

1  In  Mr.  William  Poel’s  original  revival  of  Faustus  in  1896  the  centre 
of  the  platform  was  a  curtained  erection  like  the  pageant  stage  of 
the  miracle  plays.  The  scholars  stepped  outside  this  on  to  the  plat¬ 
form  and  knelt  there  for  the  final  scene,  giving  the  effect  of  kneeling 
figures  in  the  lower  lights  of  a  stained-glass  window. 

2  Appendix,  1480. 


30 


MARLOWE’S 


Helen’s  beauty.  Mephistophilis,  now  secure  of  his  prey, 
vanishes  ;  his  work  is  done.  The  ‘  adders  and  serpents  who 
fetch  Faustus’  soul,  are  underlings.  But  the  more  potent 
spirit  is  not  forgotten :  the  last  cry  of  his  victim  as  he  is 
driven  to  hell  is  to  shriek  out  the  words  ‘  Ah  Mephistophilis  !  ’ 
Nothing  more:  but  it  sums  up  the  series  of  temptations  from 
the  moment,  twenty-four  years  earlier,  when  Faustus  first 
conjured  up  this  embodiment  of  evil  and  prided  himself  on 
securing  so  meek  a  vassal : 

How  pliant  is  this  Mephistophilis, 

Full  of  obedience  and  humility  ! 

Such  is  the  force  of  magic,  and  my  spells.1 

Marlowe,  when  he  wrote  Doctor  Faustus,  was  beginning  to 
study  the  subtle  links  of  plot. 

But  the  adapter  intervened.  He  inserted  between  the 
prose  prelude  on  which  I  have  commented  and  the  tremendous 
final  speech  an  interlude  in  which  Mephistophilis  reappears 
to  mock  his  victim,  seconded  in  this  moral  effort  by  the  Good 
and  Bad  Angels,  who  torture  Faustus  with  peep-shows  of 
Heaven  and  Hell.  The  problem  of  the  rival  quartos  involves 
some  serious  difficulties  which  are  not  likely  to  be  solved 
unless  we  recover  the  lost  quarto  of  1601.  Meanwhile  we 
must  study  the  play  in  the  earliest  and  least  contaminated 
text,  the  quarto  of  1604,  supplementing  it  with  some  genuine 
fragments  which  are  preserved  in  the  text  of  1616. 

But  even  this  earliest  quarto  is  clogged  with  rewritten 
scenes  which  read  like  a  coarse  burlesque  of  Marlowe’s  main 
motive.  They  are  not  comic  episodes  worked  artistically 
into  the  scheme  of  the  play  in  order  to  provide  an  element 
of  contrast  or  relief.  They  contain  nothing  that  suggests, 
even  remotely,  any  approach  to  the  Shakespearian  method  by 
which,  with  incomparable  art,  a  comic  scene  or  character  not 
only  diversifies  but  deepens  the  tragic  setting.  Comedy  in 
any  form,  and  I  am  afraid  particularly  in  the  form  of  horse¬ 
play,  appealed  to  an  audience  on  the  Bankside ;  and  some¬ 
times,  if  their  craving  for  it  was  not  satisfied,  there  was 
trouble  at  the  theatre.  Edmund  Gayton,  in  his  Pleasant 

1  264-6. 


TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  DR.  FAUSTUS 


31 


Notes  upon  DoF  Quixote,  published  in  1651,  describes  the 
humours  of  the  seventeenth-century  playgoer  on  a  holiday 
afternoon  when,  as  he  puts  it,  ‘  sailors,  watermen,  shoe¬ 
makers,  butchers,  and  apprentices  are  at  leisure  It  is  inter¬ 
esting  to  learn  that  Marlowe  took  with  such  an  audience. 
‘  I  have  known  upon  one  of  these  festivals,  but  especially  at 
Shrovetide,  where  the  players  have  been  appointed,  notwith¬ 
standing  their  bills  to  the  contrary,  to  act  what  the  major 
part  of  the  company  had  a  mind  to — sometimes  Tamerlane, 
sometimes  Jug urth,  sometimes  The  Jew  of  Malta ,  and  some¬ 
times  parts  of  all  these;  none  of  the  three  taking,  they  were 
forced  to  undress  and  put  off  their  tragic  habits,  and  conclude 
the  day  with  The  Merry  Milkmaids.  And  unless  this  were 
done — as  sometimes  it  so  fortuned  that  the  players  were 
refractory — the  benches,  the  tiles,  the  laths,  the  stones, 
oranges,  apples,  nuts  flew  about  most  liberally  !  ’ 1  I  quote 
one  more  tribute  which,  1  am  sure,  was  taken  from  the  life  ; 
it  is  interesting  to  find  that,  so  late  as  1625,  the  devils  of  the 
old  miracle  plays  were  retained  in  affectionate  remembrance. 
In  Jonson’s  Staple  of  News  -  Gossip  Tattle,  airing  her  theories 
of  drama,  says  :  ‘  My  husband,  Timothy  Tattle — God  rest  his 
poor  soul ! — was  wont  to  say  there  was  no  play  without  a 
Fool  or  a  Devil  in’t;  lie  was  for  the  Devil  still,  God  bless 
him  !  The  Devil  for  his  money,  would  he  say ;  “  I  would 
fain  see  the  Devil”’.2  If  Master  Timothy  Tattle  ever  saw 
The  Tragical  History  of  Doctor  Faustus,  he  must  have  felt 
for  once  that  he  had  got  his  money’s  worth  :  the  play — at 
least  in  the  form  in  which  we  have  it — abounds  in  fools  and 
devils.  And  stage-directions  such  as  the  following — 1  Beat 
the  Friars,  and  fling  fireworks  among  them  ’,3  or  ‘  Enter 
Mephistophilis  ;  sets  squibs  at  their  backs  ;  they  run  about  ’ 4 
— show  very  decisively  the  quality  of  the  fun. 

It  would  be  ludicrous  to  credit  Marlowe  with  the  author¬ 
ship  of  this  farcical  element.  Of  course,  the  mere  assertion 
that  the  genius  of  Marlowe  did  not  run  in-  the  direction  of 

1  Pleasant  Notes,  p.  271. 

1  Stujrfe  of  News,  the  first  intermean. 

3  After  903.  4  After  984 


32 


MARLOWE’S 


comedy  and  that  his  worst  extravagances,  such  as  the  scene 
of  the  ‘  pampered  jades  ’  in  Tamburlaine,  betray  a  hopeless 
lack  of  humour — though  obviously  suggestive  as  criticism — - 
cannot  be  accepted  off-hand  as  disproof  of  the  attribution. 
But  we  can  point  to  some  definite  evidence.  The  most  im¬ 
portant  is  the  memorandum  of  the  stage-manager  Henslowe 
that  on  November  22,  1602,  he  paid  four  pounds  to  William 
Bird  and  Samuel  Rowley  ‘  for  their  adicyones  in  doctor 
fostes’.  Occasionally  at  the  revival  of  an  old  play  which 
had  had  a  successful  run,  and  might  therefore  be  stale  to  the 
playgoer,  a  manager  had  a  few  new  scenes  inserted  in  this 
way  as  an  advertisement.  Interpolation  can  actually  be 
traced  in  the  1604  text.  In  the  eleventh  scene  is  a  reference 
to  Dr.  Lopez,  Queen  Elizabeth’s  physician,  who  was  hanged 
on  the  charge  of  attempting  to  poison  her  a  year  after 
Marlowe’s  death.  There  is  at  least  one  startling  contradic¬ 
tion  in  the  text :  in  the  opening  scene  Philip  is  on  the  throne 
of  Spain  ;  in  the  tenth  scene  the  Emperor  Charles  V  appears. 
There  are  also  artistic  considerations  which  point  to  the 
divided  authorship.  In  one  part  of  the  play  five  scenes  in 
succession — scenes  vii  to  xi— are  wholly  or  mainly  comic. 
No  author  gifted  with  any  true  creative  faculty  could  thus 
have  thrown  the  serious  side  of  his  subject  so  completely  out 
of  focus.  The  ninth  scene  can  be  proved  not  to  be  the  work 
of  Marlowe.  Robin,  the  ostler  at  an  inn  where  presumably 
Faustus  is  staying, — perhaps  somewhere  in  Germany,  but 
the  scene-locations  are  of  the  haziest — has  stolen  one  of 
Faustus’  conjuring  books,  and  with  it  he  raises  Mephisto- 
philis.  Now  it  happens  that  in  the  third  scene  we  have 
already  had  Faustus  conjuring.  In  the  darkness  of  night  he 
makes  a  solemn  invocation,  using  a  Latin  formula,  and  a 
devil  at  once  deludes  him  by  appearing.  This  spirit  is  dis¬ 
missed  to  return  in  the  shape  of  a  Franciscan  friar,  and 
proves  to  be  Mephistophilis.  He  explains  that  he  came  to 
Faustus,  not  in  obedience  to  the  incantation,  but  of  his  own 
accord  : 

For  when  we  hear  one  rack  the  name  of  God, 

Abjure  the  Scriptures  and  his  Saviour  Christ, 


TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  HR.  FAUSTUS 


33 


We  fly,  in  hope  to  get  his  glorious  soul  ; 

Nor  will  we  come  unless  he  use  such  means 
Whereby  he  is  in  danger  to  be  damned. 

Therefore  the  shortest  cut  for  conjuring 
Is  stoutly  to  abjure  the  Trinity 
And  pray  devoutly  to  the  Prince  of  Hell.1 
That  is  to  say,  Faustus’  spells,  which  are  just  those  of  the 
commonplace  practitioner  in  magic,  would  of  themselves 
have  been  wholly  ineffective,  but  Mephistophilis  gives  a 
subtle  and  sinister  reason  for  obeying  them.  When  Robin 
the  clown  tries  his  hand  at  conjuring,  he  mouths  some 
absolute  gibberish  which  forces  Mephistophilis  to  appear  at 
once  and  makes  him  complain  bitterly  to  Lucifer, 

From  Constantinople  am  I  hither  come 
Only  for  pleasure  of  these  damned  slaves.2 
‘  How  says  Robin,  quite  unabashed,  although  a  few  minutes 
before  he  had  been  running  about  in  terror  with  burning 
squibs  tied  to  him,  ‘from  Constantinople?  You  have  had 
a  great  journey ;  will  you  take  sixpence  in  your  purse  to  pay 
for  your  supper,  and  be  gone  ?  ’  Marlowe’s  method  of  raising 
the  devil  involved  repudiation  of  the  Trinity  and  devout 
prayer  to  Lucifer :  this  vacuous  buffoonery,  whether  it  is 
the  work  of  Bird  and  Rowley  or  of  an  earlier  interpolator, 
has  not  even  the  merit  of  a  parody. 

Consider  too  Marlowe’s  conception  of  hell.  In  spite  of  his 
employing  medieval  machinery  and  crudely  personifying 
Conscience  and  Temptation  in  the  archaic  figures  of  the  Good 
and  Bad  Angels,  his  hell  is  essentially  spiritual.  His  con¬ 
temporaries  accepted  the  coarse  material  view  of  it  as  an 
underground  torture-chamber  for  the  sinner  in  which  his 
worm  dieth  not  and  the  fire  is  not  quenched.  Marlowe  put 
aside  this  convention :  he  depicts  hell  as  a  phase  of  mental 
suffering  infinite  in  its  scope  and  duration.  Mephistophilis 
with  mordant  irony  explains  this  conception  to  Faustus 
immediately  after  he  has  signed  the  bond  to  surrender  his 
soul : 

Hell  hath  no  limits,  nor  is  circumscribed 
In  one  self  place,  for  where  we  are  is  hell, 
i  282-9.  2  995  ff. 


2339*14 


c 


34  MARLOWE’S  TRAGICAL  HISTORY  OF  DR.  FAUSTUS 


And  where  hell  is  must  we  ever  be  : 

And  to  conclude,  when  all  the  world  dissolves, 

And  every  creature  shall  be  purified, 

All  places  shall  be  hell  that  is  not  heaven.1 

A  point  like  this  shows  us  what  Goethe  meant  when  he  said 
of  Marlowe’s  play,  ‘  How  greatly  it  is  all  planned  This 
strength  of  conception,  this  clear  outlook  on  the  spiritual 
heights,  is  not  found  again  in  English  literature  until  Milton. 
There  are  passages  in  the  first  and  fourth  books  of  Paradise 
Lost  which  almost  seem  to  echo  Faustus.  Satan’s  cry  of 
anguish  in  his  address  to  the  Sun  strikes  this  note  : 

Me  miserable !  which  way  shall  I  fly 

Infinite  wrath  and  infinite  despair  ? 

Which  way  I  fly  is  Hell  ;  myself  an  Hell. 

It  would  be  hazardous  to  speculate  what  Milton  might,  and 
might  not,  have  read  in  his  undergraduate  days  when  he  was 
a  student  of  Shakespeare  and  Ben  Jonson.  It  is  possible 
that  he  read  this  play,  alien  though  much  of  it  would  be  to 
his  Puritan  temper.  But  of  course  a  coincidence  such  as  this 
need  not  mean  more  than  that  two  poets  of  genius,  treating 
in  a  very  different  medium  the  record  of  a  lost  soul,  drew 
independently  on  their  shaping  spirit  of  imagination  and 
emancipated  themselves  from  the  meanness  of  popular  theo¬ 
logy.  For  his  loftiness  of  conception  no  less  than  for  the 
deathless  music  of  his  verse  we  can  think  of  Marlowe  as 
standing  for  one  moment  by  the  side  of  Milton.  He  could 
earn  no  higher  tribute. 

Percy  Simpson. 

1  553-8. 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


The  Story 

J~RENE  is  based  on  a  story  in  The  Generali  Historie  of  the 
Turlies,  by  Richard  Knolles,  a  book  which  Johnson  always 
held  in  the  highest  regard,  and  praised  in  The  Rambler  as 
displaying  ‘  all  the  excellencies  that  narration  can  admit 
But  nowhere  was  he  content  to  versify  Knolles’s  prose,  and 
from  first  to  last  his  play  is  singularly  deficient  in  allusions 
to  be  illustrated,  or  difficulties  to  be  explained,  by  consulting 
the  material  on  which  he  worked.  It  is  the  divergencies,  not 
the  similarities,  that  are  of  interest,  and  they  are  character¬ 
istic.  In  general  we  may  say  that  Johnson  was  indebted  to 
Knolles  for  little  more  than  the  suggestion  of  his  Irene.  He 
did  not  write  with  a  book  lying  open  before  him,  but  once 
having  found  his  subject  let  it  take  shape  in  his  own  mind. 

The  story  which  is  told  by  Knolles  in  over  three  closely 
packed  folio  pages  may  thus  be  given  here  in  brief ;  but  there 
is  one  paragraph  which  must  be  quoted  in  full,  not  so  much 
because  it  wins  the  attention  of  every  reader  and  explains 
Johnson’s  praise  of  the  narrative  style,  as  because  it  shows 
why  Johnson  could  not  follow  the  story  as  he  found  it.  He 
gave  it  a  less  violent  climax,  more  in  harmony  with  his  idea 
of  the  moral  purpose  of  the  drama. 

According  to  the  story,  Irene,  a  Greek  of  incomparable 
beauty  and  rare  perfection,  was  made  captive  at  the  sack  of 
Constantinople  in  1453,  and  handed  over  to  the  Sultan 
Mahomet  II,  who  took  such  delight  in  her  that  in  a  short 
time  she  became  the  mistress  and  commander  of  the  great 
conqueror.  ‘  Mars  slept  in  Venus’  lap,  and  now  the  soldiers 
might  go  play.’  He  neglected  the  government  of  his  empire 
till  the  discontent  of  his  subjects  threatened  the  security  of 
his  throne.  Mustapha  Bassa,  his  companion  from  childhood 
and  now  his  favoured  counsellor,  thereupon  undertook  to 
warn  him  of  his  danger,  and  performed  the  difficult  duty 

C  2 


36 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


without  incurring  the  effects  of  his  anger.  Torn  awhile  by 
contrary  passions,  the  Sultan  came  to  a  sudden  decision,  and 
summoned  a  meeting  of  all  the  Bassas  for  the  next  day. 

So  the  Bassa  being  departed,  he  after  his  wonted  manner 
went  in  vnto  the  Greeke,  and  solacing  himselfe  all  that  day  and 
the  night  following  with  her,  made  more  of  her  than  euer  before  : 
and  the  more  to  please  her,  dined  with  her ;  commanding,  that 
after  dinner  she  should  be  attired  with  more  sumptuous  apparell 
than  euer  she  had  before  worne  :  and  for  the  further  gracing  of 
her,  to  be  deckt  with  many  most  precious  jewels  of  inestimable 
valour.  Whereunto  the  poore  soule  gladly  obeyed,  little  think¬ 
ing  that  it  was  her  funerall  apparell.  Now  in  the  meane  while, 
Mustapha  (altogither  ignorant  of  the  Sultans  mind)  had  as  he 
was  commanded,  caused  all  the  nobilitie,  and  commanders  of 
the  men  of  warre,  to  be  assembled  into  the  great  hall :  euerie 
man  much  marueiling,  what  should  be  the  emperors  meaning 
therein,  who  had  not  of  long  so  publikely  shewed  himselfe. 
But  being  thus  togither  assembled,  and  euerie  man  according 
as  their  minds  gaue  them,  talking  diuersly  of  the  matter : 
behold,  the  Sultan  entred  into  the  pallace  leading  the  faire 
Greeke  by  the  hand ;  who  beside  her  incomparable  beautie  and 
other  the  greatest  graces  of  nature,  adorned  also  with  all  that 
curiositie  could  deuise,  seemed  not  now  to  the  beholders  a  mortal 
wight,  but  some  of  the  stately  goddesses,  whom  the  Poets  in 
their  extacies  describe.  Thus  comming  togither  into  the  midst 
of  the  hall,  and  due  reuerence  vnto  them  done  by  al  them  there 
present  ;  he  stood  still  with  the  faire  lady  in  his  left  hand,  and 
so  furiously  looking  round  about  him,  said  vnto  them  :  I  vnder- 
stand  of  your  great  discontentment,  and  that  you  all  murmur  and 
grudge,  for  that  I,  ouercome  with  mine  affection  towards  this  so 
faire  a  paragon,  cannot  withdraw  my  selfe  from  her  presence :  But 
I  would  faine  know  which  of  you  there  is  so  temperat,  that  if  he  had 
in  his  possession  a  thing  so  rare  and  precious,  so  louely  and  so  faire, 
would  not  he  thrice  aduised  before  he  would  forgo  the  same  1  Say 
what  you  thinke  :  in  the  word  of  a  Prince  1  giue  you  free  lihertie  so 
to  doe.  But  they  all  rapt  with  an  incredible  admiration  to  see 
so  faire  a  thing,  the  like  whereof  they  had  neuer  before  beheld, 
said  all  with  one  consent,  That  he  had  with  greater  reason  so 
passed  the  time  with  her,  than  any  man  had  to  find  fault  there¬ 
with.  Whereunto  the  barbarous  prince  answered  :  Well,  hut 
now  I  will  make  you  to  vnderstand  how  far  you  haue  been  deceiued 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


37 


in  me,  and  that  there  is  no  earthly  thing  that  can  so  much  blind  my 
sences,  or  bereaue  me  of  reason  as  not  to  see  and  understand  what 
beseemeth  my  high  place  and  calling :  yea  I  would  you  should  all 
know,  that  the  honor  and  conquests  of  the  Othoman  kings  my  noble 
progenitors,  is  so  fixed  in  my  brest,  with  such  a  desire  in  my  selfe  to 
exceed  the  same,  as  that  nothing  but  death  is  able  to  put  it  out  of  my 
remembrance.  And  hauing  so  said,  presently  with  one  of  his 
hands  catching  the  faire  Greeke  by  the  haire  of  the  head,  and 
drawing  his  falchion  with  the  other,  at  one  blow  strucke  off  her 
head,  to  the  great  terror  of  them  all.  And  hauing  so  done, 
said  vnto  them :  Now  by  this  iudge  whether  your  emperour  is  able  to 
bridle  his  affections  or  not.  And  within  a  while  after,  meaning 
to  discharge  the  rest  of  his  choller,  caused  great  preparation  to 
be  made  for  the  conquest  of  Peloponesvs,  and  the  besieging  of 
Belgrade.1 

Such  is  the  story  which  Johnson  transformed  in  his  Irene. 
This  simple  tale  of  lust  and  cruelty  became  in  his  hands  a 
drama  of  the  struggle  between  virtue  and  weakness.  Irene 
is  represented  not  as  a  helpless  victim  of  the  Sultan’s  passion, 
but  as  the  mistress  of  her  fate.  Will  she  sacrifice  her  creed 
to  attain  security  and  power  ?  She  has  freedom  to  decide. 

Wilt  thou  descend,  fair  Daughter  of  Perfection, 

To  hear  my  Vows,  and  give  Mankind  a  Queen? 


To  State  and  Pow’r  I  court  thee,  not  to  Ruin  : 

Smile  on  my  Wishes,  and  command  the  Globe, 

— so  the  Sultan  woos  her.  In  order  that  this  freedom  may 
be  emphasized,  she  is  placed  in  contrast  to  Aspasia,  a  new 
character  for  whom  there  is  no  warrant  in  the  original  story. 
Aspasia  is  the  voice  of  clear  and  unflinching  virtue  ;  and  she 
is  rewarded  with  her  escape  from  slavery  in  company  with 
the  lover  of  her  choice.  But  Irene  yields,  and  pays  the 
penalty.  She  hesitates,  complies,  and  half  repents,  then  is 
betrayed  and  ordered  to  die.  Her  death  is  exhibited  by 
Johnson  as  the  punishment  of  her  weakness,  whereas  in 
Knolles’s  story  it  is  but  the  fortuitous  conclusion  of  helpless 
misfortune.  Even  in  his  first  serious  work  the  great  moralist, 

1  Histone  of  the  Turkes,  first  edition,  1603,  p.  353. 


38 


JOHNSON’S  I  BENE 


as  he  was  soon  to  be  called,  converted  a  record  of  senseless 
cruelty  into  a  study  of  temptation. 

When  some  twenty  to  thirty  years  later  Johnson  came  to 
edit  Twelfth-Night  he  criticized  the  marriage  of  Olivia  as 
wanting  credibility  and  as  failing  1  to  produce  the  proper 
instruction  required  in  the  drama,  as  it  exhibits  no  just 
picture  of  life’.  It  was  a  juster  picture  of  life  that  Irene 
should  be  strangled  at  the  Sultan’s  orders  for  her  supposed 
treachery  than  decapitated  by  him  without  warning  and 
without  reason  in  the  presence  of  his  admiring  court ;  and 
he  drew  it  so  that  there  should  be  no  mistake  about  ‘  the 
proper  instruction  required  in  the  drama  In  his  criticism 
of  -4s  You  Like  It  he  said  that  ‘  by  hastening  to  the  end  of 
his  work  Shakespeare  suppressed  the  dialogue  between  the 
usurper  and  the  hermit,  and  lost  an  opportunity  of  exhibiting 
a  moral  lesson  in  which  he  might  have  found  matter  worthy 
of  his  highest  powers’.  Johnson  never  hastened  in  his  Irene , 
and  he  never  refused  the  chance  of  a  moral  lesson.  Much  of 
the  interest  of  his  early  drama  lies  in  the  illustrations  which 
it  provides  of  his  later  critical  precepts  or  observations,  for 
he  held  the  same  opinions  throughout  all  his  fifty  years  as  an 
author ;  they  show  change  only  in  the  confidence  with  which 
they  are  expressed.  ‘  I  do  not  see  that  The  Bard  promotes 
any  truth,  moral  or  political  ’ — so  he  said  in  his  Life  of  Gray  i 
and  if  we  want  to  know  what  he  meant  we  cannot  do  better 
than  turn  to  his  Irene. 

Of  the  political  truths  it  cannot  be  said — again  to  quote 
the  Life  of  Gray — that  we  have  never  seen  them  in  any  other 
place;  some  of  them  were  expressed  elsewhere  by  Johnson 
himself,  and  better.  The  downfall  of  a  nation  is  due  not  so 
much  to  the  strength  of  the  conqueror  as  to  weakness  and 
vice  at  home, 

A  feeble  Government,  eluded  Laws, 

A  factious  Populace,  luxurious  Nobles, 

And  all  the  Maladies  of  sinking  States. 

Empires  are  weakened  by  the  lust  of  conquest  and  possession  : 

Extended  Empire,  like  expanded  Gold, 

Exchanges  solid  Strength  for  feeble  Splendor. 


-JOHNSON’S  IRENE  39 

In  the  perfect  state  all  classes  work  together  for  the  good  of 
the  whole  : 

If  there  be  any  Land,  as  Fame  reports, 

Where  common  Laws  restrain  the  Prince  and  Subject, 

A  happy  Land,  where  circulating  Pow’r 

Flows  through  each  Member  of  th’embodied  State, 

Sure,  not  unconscious  of  the  mighty  Blessing, 

Her  grateful  Sons  shine  bright  with  ev’ry  Virtue  ; 

Untainted  with  the  Lust  of  Innovation, 

Sure  all  unite  to  hold  her  League  of  Rule 
Unbroken  as  the  sacred  Chain  of  Nature, 

That  links  the  jarring  Elements  in  Peace. 

This  is  a  good  statement  of  Johnson’s  Tory  creed,  and  none 
the  worse  for  the  implied  satire  on  the  Whigs.  It  is  the  only 
passage  in  Irene  in  which  the  political  allusion  is  specific  ; 
and  it  is  introduced  cautiously,  with  the  responsibility  for  the 
anachronism  thrown  on  the  broad  shoulders  of  Fame,  for  it 
was  not  the  English  constitution  in  the  days  of  the  Wars  of 
the  Roses  that  Johnson  had  in  his  mind  to  praise. 

The  moral  truths  abound.  In  The  Beauties  of  the  English 
Drama,  a  collection  of  ‘  the  most  celebrated  Passages,  Solilo- 
ques,  Similies,  Descriptions  ’  which  was  published  in  1777,  no 
fewer  than  thirty-two  passages  are  given  from  Irene  amount¬ 
ing  in  all  to  close  on  three  hundred  lines.  Even  of  the  best 
we  have  to  say  that  if  they  lend  themselves  to  quotation, 
they  do  not  dwell  on  the  memory.  Johnson  moves  more 
easily  in  the  rhymed  couplet  than  in  blank  verse,  and  is  still 
more  forcible  in  prose. 

The  characters  are  said  to  be  Turks  and  Greeks,  but  if  they 
were  called  by  other  names  the  play  would  lose  nothing. 
They  are  members,  or  attendants,  of  the  great  family  of 
tragic  heroes  of  Drury  Lane,  and  what  they  say  has  no  local 
or  racial  limits  in  its  application.  But  the  play  was  suggested 
by  a  story  that  belongs  to  the  year  1456, 1  and  there  is  there¬ 
fore  one  allusion  to  the  Renaissance  : 

1  According  to  Knolles’s  narrative,  Irene  was  captured  at  the  siege  of 
Constantinople  in  1453  and  murdered  just  before  the  siege  of  Belgrade 
in  1456.  ‘This  amorous  passion  induced  the  space  of  three  continuall 
yeres’  (Painter,  Palace  of  Pleasure). 


40 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


The  mighty  Tuscan  courts  the  banish’d  Arts 
To  kind  Italia’s  hospitable  Shades  ; 

There  shall  soft  Pleasure  wing  th’excursive  Soul, 

And  Peace  propitious  smile  on  fond  Desire  ; 

There  shall  despotick  Eloquence  resume 
Her  ancient  Empire  o’er  the  yielding  Heart  ; 

There  Poetry  shall  tune  her  sacred  Voice, 

And  wake  from  Ignorance  the  Western  World. 

This  is  the  one  clear  indication  of  the  time  of  the  play,  and 
it  may  easily  be  missed.  It  was  sufficient  that  Irene  should 
conform  to  these  great  postulates  of  the  regular  drama — that 
human  nature  is  everywhere  much  the  same,  and  that  what 
may  happen  at  one  time  may  well  happen  at  another.  A  story 
laid  in  Constantinople  in  the  middle  of  the  fifteenth  century 
could  be  made  rich  in  moral  lessons  for  a  London  audience  of 
the  eighteenth. 

Johnson  was  not  the  first  to  make  a  drama  out  of  Knolles’s 
story.  His  is  the  fourth  extant  play  on  Irene  in  English. 
The  other  three  have  long  been  forgotten,  and  at  least  one 
of  them  is  now  not  easily  found.  Here  therefore  are  their 
titles  in  full : 


I.  The  Tragedy  of  The  unhappy  Fair  Irene.  By  Gilbert  Swin- 
hoe,  Esq;  London :  Printed  by  J.  Streater,  for  J.  Place,  at 
Furnifals  Inn  Gate,  in  Holborn,  M.DC.LVIII. 


II.  Irena,  A  Tragedy,  j  Licensed,  ^  Roger  L’Estrange.  | 

London,  Printed  by  Robert  White  for  Octavian  Pulleyn 
Junior,  at  the  sign  of  the  Bible  in  St  Pauls  Churchyard  near 
the  little  North-door.  1664. 


III.  Irene  ;  Or,  The  Fair  Greek,  A  Tragedy  :  As  it  is  Acted  at 
the  Theatre  Royal  in  Drury-Lane,  By  Her  Majesty’s  Sworn 
Servants.  London  :  Printed  for  John  Bay  ley  at  the  Judge’s 
Head  in  Chancery-Lane,  near  Fleetstreet.  1708. 

The  first  of  these  is  the  crude  work  of  a  young  North¬ 
umbrian,  of  whom  little  is  now  known  beyond  what  may  be 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


41 


learned  from  the  commendatory  verses.1  His  Irene  denies 
the  Sultan.  She  asks 

but  one  Weeks  respite, 

To  beg  from  our  great  Deity  concurrence  to  your  Yoak  ; 
and  ‘  a  pious  Mufty  ’  whom  the  Sultan  had  brought  ‘  to  joyn 
our  hands  as  well  as  hearts  ’  decides  that 

This  her  Petition,  in  honour,  cannot  be  deny’d. 

The  people  rise  to  free  the  Sultan  from  her  enchantments, 
and  he  yields  to  their  wishes. 

The  great  content  the  Emperour  took  in  her, 

Made  him  lay  by  the  great  Affairs  of  State  to  court  her : 

At  which  the  imperious  Souldiers  high  incens’t, 

Forc’t  his  unwilling  hand  to  part  her  head  and  body. 

Yet  on  the  morrow  of  her  murder  she  was  to  have  been  his 
‘  royal  bride  ’.  Irene  had  ‘  kept  aloufe  ’,  and  she  died  thinking 
of  a  former  lover.  This  youthful  exercise  in  dramatic  com¬ 
position  was  written  at  a  time  when  there  was  little  chance 
of  its  being  acted,  and — we  might  add — could  never  have 
been  acted.  Swinhoe  was  not  well  served  by  his  printer ; 
but  no  printer,  and  no  prosodist,  could  have  brought  the 
semblance  of  regularity  into  the  verse — if  so  it  may  be  called 
— which  is  an  odd  jumble  of  groups  of  words  divided  as  lines 
and  ranging  from  four  to  twent}^  syllables. 

The  anonymous  author  of  Irena  found  in  Knolles’s  story 
the  opportunity  for  nothing  less  than  a  genuine  Heroic  Play. 
The  imperious  Sultan  becomes  at  his  hands  a  love-sick  swain, 
whose  only  thought  is  to  be  1  the  more  worthy  to  enjoy  the 
title  of  fair  Irena’s  servant  ’.  Irena  is  all  Virtue,  and  Mahomet 
is  all  Love  and  Honour.  When  his  subjects  rebel,  his  life  is 
saved  by  Irena’s  chosen  lover,  to  whom  he  resigns  her  in  an 
ecstasy  of  gratitude  and  magnanimity.  Whereupon  he  is 
rewarded  with  her  commendation  : 

You’ve  obtained  more  glory  by  thus  conquering 
Of  your  self,  than  ’ere  you  did  by  triumphing 
O’re  your  enemies. 

1  Cf.  Jhe  History  of  North  Durham,  by  Janies  Raine,  1852,  p.  184,  and 
A  History  of  Northumberland,  vol.  i,  by  Edward  Bateson,  1898,  p.  212, 
and  vol.  v,  by  John  Crawford  Hodgson,  1899,  p.  458  note. 


42 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


To  protect  himself  from  his  subjects  he  has  to  appear  to 
kill  Irena,  but  he  kills  a  slave  in  her  place.  Another  woman 
character  is  introduced  with  the  purpose  of  adding  splendour 
to  Irena’s  virtue,  and  emphasizing  her  nice  observance  of 
‘  a  Punctilio  of  Love  and  Constancy  ’ ;  and  all  ends  happily 
with  a  double  marriage.  The  play  is  mainly  in  prose  printed 
as  verse,  but  the  monologues  and  the  passages  of  argument 
and  repartee  are  occasionally  in  the  rhymed  couplet  which 
was  then  becoming  the  recognized  metre  of  this  form  of 
drama.  It  appears  not  to  have  been  acted. 

Such  violent  liberties  were  not  taken  by  Charles  Goring  in 
his  Irene,  or  the  Fair  Greek.  Here  Irene  laments  her  fate 
from  first  to  last.  She  has  not  yielded  in  her  heart  to  the 
Sultan,  but  her  coldness  and  disdain  keep  alive  his  passion, 
and  when  he  kills  her  to  allay  the  dissatisfaction  of  his  sub¬ 
jects,  he  tells  her  to  consider  her  murder  ‘  th’  extremest  Proof 
of  wondrous  Love  ’.  The  additional  woman  character  is  the 
Queen  Mother,  whose  jealousy  has  stirred  up  the  opposition 
that  led  to  Irene’s  death.  The  play — in  normal  blank  verse 
with  occasional  passages  in  rhyme — was  produced  at  Drury 
Lane  on  9  February  1708,  and  ran  for  three  nights.  It  was 
successful  enough  to  be  twice  quoted  in  Thesaurus  Dra- 
maticus 1  (1724),  the  first  English  anthology  1  confined  to  the 
tragic  muse  ’. 

The  interest  of  these  plays  lies  mainly,  and  to  the  reader 
of  Johnson  perhaps  wholly,  in  the  treatment  of  the  central 
figure.  There  is  no  question  of  borrowing.  None  of  them 
owes  anything  to  another,  nor  did  they  provide  anything  to 
their  greater  successor.  The  two  earlier  plays  Johnson  may 
be  assumed  not  to  have  known  ;  if  he  happened  to  know 
Goring’s,  he  certainly  took  nothing  from  it.  Here  ai'e  four 
independent  renderings  of  Knolles’s  story,  and  four  distinct 
presentations  of  the  character  of  Irene.  A  comparison  serves 
to  bring  out  in  strong  relief  the  characteristic  moral  quality 
of  Johnson’s  work. 

But  the  story  of  Irene  was  well  known  before  Knolles 

1  Expanded  into  The  Beauties  of  the  English  Stage  (1737),  and  The 
Beauties  of  the  English  Drama  (1777). 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


43 


wrote  his  history.  There  was  a  fifth  play,  the  lost  Elizabethan 
play  by  George  Peele,  described  in  the  Merrie  conceited  Jests 
as  ‘  the  famous  play  of  the  Turkish  Mahamet  and  Hyrin 
the  fair  Greek  Hyrin,  or  Hiren — a  familiar  term  to  the 
Elizabethans,  and  long  a  puzzle  to  the  annotators  of  Shake¬ 
speare — is  none  other  than  Irene. 

It  was  Bandello  who  first  told  the  story  in  print.  He  says 
he  heard  it  from  Francesco  Appiano,  a  doctor  and  learned 
philosopher,  the  great-grandson  of  Francesco  Appiano  who 
was  doctor  to  Francesco  Sforza  II,  Duke  of  Milan,  and  a 
contemporary  of  Mahomet  II.  It  may  have  little  or  no 
foundation  in  fact ;  it  may  well  be  only  a  revival  of  the 
old  story  of  Alexander,  adapted  to  a  century  that  was  much 
occupied  with  the  amorousness  and  the  cruelty  of  the  Turk. 
What  alone  concerns  us  here  is  that  Bandello  made  it  the 
subject  of  his  tenth  novella,  entitled  •  ‘  Maometto  imperador 
de’  turchi  crudelmente  ammazza  una  sua  donna  and  first 
published  in  1554.  The  story  soon  spread  throughout  Europe. 
A  French  version  was  given  in  1559  in  Histoires  Tragiques 
Extraictes  des  Oeuvres  Italienv.es  de  Bandel,  &  mises  en  nostre 
langue  Francoise,  par  Pierre  Boaistuciu  surnomme  Launay, 
natif  de  Bretaigne,  and  was  reprinted  in  1564  in  Belleforest’s 
continuation  and  enlargement  of  Boaistuau’s  collection.  It 
appeared  in  English  in  1566  as  the  fortieth  novel  in  Painter’s 
Palace  of  Pleasure.  Then  it  was  swept  up  in  the  widespread 
net  of  the  Latin  historians  of  Turkey.  Martinus  Crusius  gave 
it  in  his  Turcogrsecise  Libri  Octo  (Basle,  1584,  pp.  101-2), 
translating  it  from  the  French.1  Joachimus  Camerarius,  in 
his  De  Rebus  Turcicis  (Frankfurt,  1598,  p,  60),  took  it  directly 
from  the  Italian.2  In  the  Latin  writers  Knolles  had  authority 
to  include  it  in  his  majestic  history.  But  he  was  not  content 
to  work  on  the  somewhat  condensed  versions  which  they 
provided.  He  had  recourse  to  Painter’s  Palace  of  Pleasure, 

1  ‘Excerpsi  ex  Gallica  conuersione  partis  operum  Italicorum  Bandeli  ’ 
(Crusius,  1584,  p.  101). 

2  ‘  Non  potui  facere  quin  adiicerem  id  quod  in  Italicis  narrationibus 
&  de  hoc  Mahometha  traditum  reperissem’  (Camerarius,  1598,  p.  60). 


44 


JOHNSON'S  IRENE 


and  produced  a  skilful  and  even  masterly  rehandling  of  what 
he  read  in  that  collection  of  stories. 

That  the  lost  Elizabethan  play  was  founded  on  the  novel 
in  The  Palace  of  Pleasure  is  not  a  rash  assumption.  Bandello’s 
‘Irenea  ’  had  become  ‘  Hyrende  ’  in  the  French  of  Boaistuau, 
and  ‘  Hyrenee  ’  or  ‘  Hirenee  ’  in  the  English  of  Painter ;  and 
when  Peele  brought  her  on  the  English  stage  she  was  ‘  Hyrin  ’ 
or  ‘Hiren’.  From  the  reference  to  the  play  in  the  Merrie 
Jests,  and  from  the  vogue  which  the  word  suddenly  acquired, 
we  can  deduce  something  of  the  character  of  her  part.  She 
must  have  differed  widely  from  Johnson’s  Irene,  else  her 
name  would  not  have  supplied  an  already  ample  vocabulary 
with  a  new  term  conveniently  like  ‘  syren 

Johnson  missed  an  opportunity  when  he  edited  Shake¬ 
speare.  He  did  not  suspect  the  relationship  of  Pistol’s  Hiren 
to  the  heroine  of  his  own  tragedy. 

Composition  atul  Performance 

Irene  was  produced  under  the  name  Mahomet  and  Irene  at 
Drury  Lane  Theatre  on  Monday,  6  February  1749,  and  had 
a  run  of  nine  nights,  the  last  performance  taking  place  on 
Monday,  20  February.  It  was  acted  on  the  intervening 
Tuesdays  (7,  14),  Thursdays  (9,  16),  Saturdays  (11,  18),  and 
Monday  (13),  the  theatre  being  closed  on  the  Wednesdays 
and  Fridays.  Johnson’s  three  benefit  nights  were  the  9th, 
14th,  and  20th.  None  of  the  theatre  bills  is  known  to  have 
been  preserved,  but  in  their  place  we  have  full  announce¬ 
ments  in  The  General  Advertiser.  From  it  we  also  learn  that 
Irene  was  published  on  Thursday,  16  February. 

When  Arthur  Murphy  wrote  his  four  articles  on  Hawkins’s 
edition  of  Johnson’s  Works  in  The  Monthly  Review  in  1787, 
he  stated  in  one  of  them  that  Irene  was  acted  ‘in  all  thirteen 
nights  ’,  as  its  run  was  uninterrupted  from  Monday  the  6th  to 
Monday  the  20th.  This  statement — and  much  more  in  these 
articles — he  repeated  in  his  Essay  on  the  Life  and  Genius  of 
Johnson  in  1792.1  He  forgot  about  Lent.  In  the  eighteenth 

1  Alexander  Chalmers  accuses  Murphy  of  taking  the  greater  part  of 
his  Essay  from  the  Monthly  Reviewer  without  acknowledgement.  But 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


45 


century  the  London  theatres  were  closed  in  Lent  on  Wednes¬ 
days  and  Fridays,  and  in  1749  Ash  Wednesday  fell  on 
8  February. 

Though  not  given  to  the  public  till  1749,  Irene  was  the 
earliest  of  Johnson’s  more  important  works.  He  was  engaged 
on  it  while  running  his  school  at  Edial,  near  Lichfield,  and 
had  written  ‘  a  great  part’  before  he  set  out  in  March  1737 
to  seek  his  fortune  in  London.  According  to  Boswell  he  had 
written  only  three  acts  before  his  short  stay  at  Greenwich, 
and  while  there  1  used  to  compose,  walking  in  the  Park  ’,  but 
he  did  not  finish  it  till  his  return  to  Lichfield  in  the  course  of 
the  summer  to  settle  his  affairs.  There  is  proof,  however,  that 
the  conclusion  had  been  planned  and  partly  written  while  he 
was  still  at  Edial.  The  manuscript  of  his  first  draft — now  in 
the  British  Museum — contains  in  somewhat  haphazard  order 
matter  that  was  ultimately  worked  up  into  each  of  the  five 
acts,  or  incorporated  in  them  without  change.  All  that  can 
be  assigned  to  the  spring  and  summer  of  1737  is  the  com¬ 
pletion  and  revision  of  the  play. 

This  manuscript  is  of  particular  interest  as  it  is  the  only 
first  draft  of  any  of  Johnson’s  major  works  1  ;  and  it  shows 
the  effort  that  Irene  had  cost  him.  As  far  as  we  know 
he  never  took  such  pains  again.  The  subject-matter  of 
each  scene  is  written  out  in  detail ;  the  characters  are 
described — some  are  named  who  were  afterwards  omitted ; 
there  are  page  references  to  authorities.  Johnson  had  read 

the  Monthly  Reviewer  was  Murphy  himself.  He  returned  to  these  articles 
after  the  appearance  of  Boswell’s  Lif e,  to  work  them  up  into  ‘  a  short, 
yet  full,  a  faithful,  yet  temperate,  history  of  Dr.  Johnson  ’. 

It  is  only  fair  to  Murphy  to  add  that  if  he  says  ‘  thirteen  nights  ’  in 
The  Monthly  Review  for  August  1787,  p.  135,  he  had  said  ‘nine  nights  ’ 
in  the  April  number,  p.  290,  and  reverted  to  ‘  nine  nights  ’  in  his  Life  of 
Gat-rick,  1801,  i,  p.  163.  The  error  would  be  negligible  were  it  not  that 
it  has  recently  cropped  up  again.  In  calculations  of  ‘  runs  ’  in  the 
eighteenth  century  the  time  of  the  year  must  be  taken  into  consideration. 

1  The  original  draft  and  the  second  draft  of  The  Plan  of  a  Dictionary 
of  the  English  Language,  1747,  are  both  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  R.  B. 
Adam,  of  Buffalo,  N.  Y.  (see  the  Catalogue  of  the  Johnsonian  Collection  of 
R.  B.  Adam,  1921)  ;  but  the  Plan  is  not  a  major  work. 


46 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


widely  in  Knolles’s  llistorie,  and  had  at  least  consulted  George 
Sandys’s  Relation  of  a  Journey  .  .  .  Containing  a  description 
of  the  Turkish  Empire ,  1615,  and  Herbelot’s  Bibliotheque 
Orientate,  1697. 

Then  came  the  trouble  of  getting  the  play  brought  upon 
the  stage.  Peter  Garrick,  the  actor’s  elder  brother,  told 
Boswell  what  he  recollected  in  1776,  and  Boswell  jotted 
down  this  in  his  Note  Book  : 

Peter  Garrick  told  me,  that  M1'  Johnson  went  first  to  London 
to  see  what  could  be  made  of  his  Tragedy  of  Irene  that  he 
remembers  his  borrowing  the  Turkish  history  (I  think  Peter 
said  of  him)  in  order  to  take  the  story  of  his  Play  out  of  it. 
That  he  &  Mr  Johnson  went  to  the  Fountain  tavern  by  them¬ 
selves,  &  Mr  Johnson  read  it  to  him — This  Mr  Peter  Garrick 
told  me  at  Lichfield  Sunday  24  March  1776.  .  .  .  He  said  he 
spoke  to  Fleetwood  the  Manager  at  Goodman’s  Fields  to  receive 
Irene.  But  Fleetwood  would  not  read  it ;  probably  as  it  was 
not  recommended  by  some  great  Patron.1 

Both  the  Garricks  used  what  influence  they  had  with 
Charles  Fleetwood,  the  manager  of  Drury  Lane  Theatre,  and 
for  some  time  they  seemed  likely  to  be  successful.  In  a  letter 
to  his  wife  on  31  January  1740,  Johnson  reported  that 

David  wrote  to  me  this  day  on  the  affair  of  Irene,  who  is  at 
last  become  a  kind  of  Favourite  among  the  Players.  Mr.  Flete- 
wood  promises  to  give  a  promise  in  writing  that  it  shall  be  the 
first  next  season,  if  it  cannot  be  introduced  now,  and  Chetwood 
the  Prompter  is  desirous  of  bargaining  for  the  copy,  and  offers 
fifty  Guineas  for  the  right  of  printing  after  it  shall  be  played. 
I  hope  it  will  at  length  reward  me  for  my  perplexities.2 
It  was  only  the  promise  of  a  promise,  and  Fleetwood  was 
an  adept  in  the  art  of  evasion.  Next  year  we  find  Johnson 
so  far  discouraged  by  the  actors  as  to  turn  to  the  booksellers. 
Edward  Cave,  always  ready  to  assist  his  mainstay  on  The 
Gentleman’ s  Magazine ,  wrote  thus  to  Thomas  Birch  on 
9  September  1741 : 

1  Boswell's  Note  Book  1776-1777  .  .  .  Now  first  published  from,  the  unique 
original  in  the  collection  of  R.  B.  Adam  (ed.  R.  W.  C.).  The  Oxford 
Miscellany,  1925,  p.  11. 

2  Letters,  ed.  G.  B.  Hill,  i,  pp.  4,  5. 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE  4 7 

I  have  put  Mr  J ohnson’s  Play  into  Mr  Gray’s  Hands,  in  order 
to  sell  it  to  him,  if  he  is  inclined  to  buy  it,  but  I  doubt  whether 
he  will  or  not.  He  would  dispose  of  Copy  and  whatever 
Advantage  may  be  made  by  acting  it.  Would  your  Society,  or 
any  Gentleman  or  Body  of  men,  that  you  know,  take  such  a 
Bargain?  Both  he  and  I  are  very  unfit  to  deal  with  the  Theatrical 
Persons.  Fletewood  was  to  have  acted  it  last  Season,  but 
Johnson’s  diffidence  or  prevented  it. 

Johnson  was  evidently  abandoning  hope  of  ever  seeing  the 
play  on  the  stage,  and  was  resigned  to  get  what  money  he 
could  for  it  by  publication.  But  John  Gray,  the  bookseller 
who  brought  out  Lillo’s  pieces,  would  not  buy  it.  A  further 
stage  in  despondency  is  reached  when  Johnson  is  content  to 
lend  the  manuscript  to  his  friends.  ‘  Keep  Irene  close,  you 
may  send  it  back  at  your  leisure  ’  is  what  he  wrote  to  John 
Taylor,  rector  of  Market  Bosworth,  on  10  June  1742.2 

The  turn  in  the  fortunes  of  the  play  came  when  David 
Garrick,  his  old  pupil  and  friend,  assumed  the  managership 
of  Drury  Lane.  Garrick  had  always  been  anxious  to  see 
Irene  given  a  chance,  and  now  that  he  was  under  a  special 
debt  for  the  great  Prologue  with  which  his  managership  had 
been  inaugurated,  he  decided  to  make  it  one  of  the  features 
of  the  next  season.  He  chose  a  very  strong  cast,  including 
Barry,  Mrs.  Pritchard,  Mrs.  Cibber,  as  well  as  himself  ;  and  he 
provided  the  further  attraction  of  new  dresses  and  stage- 
decorations.  ‘Never’,  says  Hawkins,  ‘was  there  such  a  dis¬ 
play  of  eastern  magnificence  as  this  spectacle  exhibited.’3 
‘  The  dresses  ’,  says  Davies,  ‘  were  rich  and  magnificent,  and 
the  scenes  splendid  and  gay,  such  as  were  well  adapted  to 
the  inside  of  a  Turkish  seraglio;  the  view  of  the  gardens 
belonging  to  it  was  in  the  taste  of  eastern  elegance.’4  The 
main  difficulty  was  to  induce  Johnson  to  consent  to  altera¬ 
tions  which  Garrick  knew  by  experience  to  be  necessary.  He 

1  British  Museum,  Birch  MSS.  4302,  f.  109;  quoted  with  slight  in- 
accuracies,  by  Boswell,  i,  p.  153.  There  is  a  purposed  blank  in  the  manu¬ 
script  after  ‘  diffidence  or  ’ — not  an  illegible  word,  nor  an  obliteration, 
nor  a  dash,  nor  a  tear. 

2  Letters,  i,  p.  11.  s  Life,  1787,  p.  199. 

4  Memoirs  of  Garrick,  1780,  i,  p.  120. 


48 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


told  Boswell  long  afterwards  that  Johnson  not  only  had  not 
the  faculty  of  producing  the  impressions  of  tragedy,  but  that 
he  had  not  the  sensibility  to  perceive  them.1  ‘  When  Johnson 
writes  tragedy  he  said  to  Murphy,  ‘  declamation  roars ,  and 
passion  sleeps ;  when  Shakespeare  wrote,  he  dipped  his  pen 
in  his  own  heart.’  2  Garrick  knew  that  Irene  would  succeed 
only  by  the  efforts  of  the  players  ;  and  Johnson  on  his  part 
feared  that  their  methods  of  enlivening  the  action  would 
detract  from  the  seriousness  of  his  purpose,  and  obscure  the 
worth  of  his  studied  lines.  ‘Sir,’  he  said  indignantly,  ‘the 
fellow  wants  me  to  make  Mahomet  run  mad,  that  he  may 
have  an  opportunity  of  tossing  his  hands  and  kicking  his 
heels.’3  We  may  believe  that  he  was  strengthened  in  his 
indignation  by  the  recollection  of  what  he  had  recently 
written  about  Savage’s  experience  with  Colley  Cibber — 
‘  having  little  interest  or  reputation,  he  was  obliged  to  sub¬ 
mit  himself  wholly  to  the  players,  and  admit,  with  whatever 
reluctance,  the  emendations  of  Mr.  Cibber,  which  he  always 
considered  as  the  disgrace  of  his  performance  ’.4  But  Garrick 
insisted,  and  Johnson  had  to  yield.  What  these  alterations 
were,  there  is  nothing  now  to  show.  The  manuscript  affords 
no  clue,  as  it  is  only  a  first  draft ;  nor  does  the  book.  Most 
probably  the  play  was  printed  exactly  as  it  had  been  written. 
The  one  alteration  by  Garrick  of  which  there  is  record  affects 
only  the  action,  and  it  had  to  be  abandoned.  This  was  the 
strangling  of  Irene  by  a  bow-string  on  the  stage.  The  author 
of  a  tragedy  in  which  the  scene  does  not  change  and  all  is 
supposed  to  happen  within  one  day 5  could  be  trusted  not  to 
kill  his  heroine  before  the  eyes  of  the  audience,  and  must 
have  consented  with  no  goodwill  to  so  gross  a  violation  of 
the  methods  of  the  regular  drama.  As  events  proved,  Garrick 
had  gone  too  far  in  his  desire  for  stirring  action.  The 

1  Life ,  ed.  G.  B.  Hill,  i,  p.  198.  2  Essay ,  1792,  p.  53. 

3  Life,  i,  p.  196. 

4  Life  of  Mr.  Richard  Savage,  1744,  p.  23  ;  The  Lives  of  the  Poets,  ed. 
G.  B.  Hill,  ii.  339. 

6  According  to  the  manuscript  the  Scene  is  ‘  a  Garden  near  the  Walls 
of  Constantinople  ’,  and  the  Time  is  ‘  Ten  days  after  the  taking  of  it  ’ 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


49 


strangling  of  Irene  was  at  once  greeted  with  cries  of  ‘Murder, 
Murder  though  John  Bull,  as  Charles  Burney  put  it,1  will 
allow  a  dramatic  poet  to  stab  or  slay  by  hundreds,  and  her 
death  had  to  take  place  as  Johnson  had  designed.  From  the 
evidence  of  a  Diary  once  in  the  possession  of  Mrs.  Garrick, 
the  change  was  made  after  the  second  night : 

Feb.  6,  1749.  Irene.  Written  by  Mr.  Johnson — went  off 
very  well  for  4  Acts,  the  5th  Hiss’d  generally. 

Feb.  7.  Ditto.  5th  Act  hiss’d  again.2 

Burney  and  Davies,  however,  both  say  that  the  offence  was 
removed  after  the  first  night.  Garrick  must  have  been 
responsible  also  for  the  stage-name  Mahomet  and  Irene.3 

The  play  was  received  without  enthusiasm.  The  most 
adverse  account  is  given  by  Hawkins  who,  always  lukewarm, 
says  that  it  met  with  cold  applause.  Burney,  a  man  of 
warmer  temperament,  who  was  present  at  the  first  per¬ 
formance  and  several  of  the  others,  remembered  that  it  was 
much  applauded  the  first  night  and  that  there  was  not  the 
least  opposition  after  the  death-scene  had  been  removed. 
But  a  letter  from  Aaron  Hill  to  Mallet,  written  while  the 
play  was  in  the  middle  of  its  run,  shows  that  the  chief 
attraction  to  him — and  we  may  presume  to  many  others — 
lay  in  the  dresses  and  the  acting  : 

‘  I  was  in  town  ’,  he  wrote  on  15  February,  ‘  at  the  Anamolous 
(sic)  Mr.  Johnson’s  benefit,  and  found  the  Play  his  proper  repre¬ 
sentative,  strong  sense,  ungrac’d  by  sweetness,  or  decorum  : 
Mr.  Garrick  made  the  most  of  a  detach’d,  and  almost  independent 
character.  He  was  elegantly  dress’d,  and  charm’d  me  infinitely, 
by  an  unexampled  silent  force  of  painted  action ;  and  by  a 
peculiar  touchingness,  in  cadency  of  voice,  from  exclamation, 
sinking  into  pensive  lownesses,  that  both  surpriz’d,  and  inter- 

1  In  a  note  printed  in  the  third  edition  of  Boswell’s  Life. 

2  Sold  at  Puttick  and  Simpson’s  on  11  July  1900,  ‘  Catalogue  of  Auto¬ 
graph  Letters  and  Documents’,  p.  16. 

3  Clearly  in  1749  Mahomet  and  Irene  was  expected  to  draw  larger 
audiences  than  plain  Irene  would.  But  was  the  theatre  manager  playing 
to  the  gulls,  and  thinking  not  merely  of  the  Great  Turk  but  also  of  his 
popular  little  brother  of  the  same  name  who  is  mentioned  in  the  Drury 
Lane  Prologue  ? 


2339-14 


D 


50 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


ested  !  Mrs.  Cibber,  too,  was  beautifully  dressed,  and  did  the 
utmost  justice  to  her  part.  But  I  was  sorry  to  see  Mahomet 
(in  Mr.  B-y)  lose  the  influence  of  an  attractive  figure  and  degrade 
the  awfulness  of  an  imperious  Sultan,  the  impressive  menace  of 
a  martial  conqueror,  and  the  beseeching  tendernesses  of  an  amorous 
sollicitor,  by  an  unpointed  restlessness  of  leaping  levity,  that 
neither  carried  weight  to  suit  his  dignity,  nor  struck  out  purpose, 
to  express  his  passions? 

Garrick  had  evidently  no  difficulty  in  carrying  the  per¬ 
formance  to  the  sixth  night.  In  order  to  carry  it  to  the 
ninth,  so  that  Johnson  might  have  three  third-night  benefits, 
he  had  recourse  to  expedients  which  Johnson  cannot  have 
liked.  On  the  seventh  night  this  grave  tragedy  was  sup¬ 
plemented  with  lighter  entertainment.  It  was  not  uncommon 
at  this  time  to  add  a  farce  to  a  serious  play,  and  it  is  to  the 
credit  of  Irene  to  have  survived  to  the  sixth  night  without 
such  aid ;  it  was  not  uncommon  also  to  add  dancing ;  but  on 
the  seventh  night  Garrick  added  both  a  farce  and  dancing — 
and  Scotch  dancing.  According  to  the  announcement  in  The 
General  Advertiser  the  play  was  presented — 

With  Entertainments  of  Dancing,  particularly 
The  Scotch  Dance  by  Mr  Cooke,  Mad.  Anne  Auretti,  &c. 

To  which  (by  Desire)  will  be  added  a  Farce,  call’d 
The  ANATOMIST; 

Or,  The  Sham-Doctor. 

On  the  eighth  night  the  Scotch  Dance  2  was  repeated,  with 
Garrick’s  farce  The  Lying  Valet ;  on  the  ninth  there  were 
‘  the  Savoyard  Dance  by  Mr.  Matthews,  Mr.  Addison,  &c. 

1  Works  of  Aaron  Hill,  1758,  ii,  pp.  355-6. 

2  Dances  were  a  l-ecognized  means  of  swelling  the  audience  on  a 
benefit  night,  and  before  Garrick’s  time  were  added  at  the  author’s  risk. 
According  to  The  Prompter,  no.  cxv,  16  December  1735,  the  author  some¬ 
times  lost  heavily  :  ‘Third  Nights  are  so  high,  against  an  Author,  that 
unless  he  can  make  very  considerable  Interest,  he  may  be  in  Danger  of 
losing,  instead  of  gaining.  The  Expence  of  Dancers  extraordinary,  and 
pantomimical  Machinery,  swell  the  Account  to  such  a  Height,  that  an 
Author  now,  who  accepts  the  Conditions  of  his  Benefit,  only  games. 
’Tis  a  Theatrical  Pharoah,  he  may  gain  three  times  as  much  as  he  stakes ; 
or  he  may  lose  his  Stake,  as  well  as  his  Time  and  Labour.'  We  need  not 
assume  that  Johnson  ran  any  risk  with  the  Scotch  dancing. 


51 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 

and  Fielding’s  farce  The  Virgin  Unmasked.  Short  as  this 
run  of  nine  nights  may  now  appear,  it  compares  not  un¬ 
favourably  with  other  runs  about  the  same  time.  The 
twenty  nights  of  Cato  in  April  and  May  1713  still  remained 
the  record  for  a  tragedy.  Thomson’s  Tancred  and  Sigis- 
munda  (1745)  had  nine  nights,  and  his  Coriolanus,  produced 
immediately  before  Irene,  had  ten,  and  Aaron  Hill’s  Merope, 
produced  immediately  after  it,  had  nine  with  two  additional 
performances  (one  ‘  by  particular  desire  ’,  the  other  by  royal 
command)  at  intervals  of  a  week;  Moore’s  Gamester  (1753) 
had  ten  with  an  eleventh  a  week  later,  Young’s  Brothers 
(1753)  had  nine,  and  Glover’s  Boadicea  (1753)  had  ten.1  The 
mere  number  of  performances  is  thus  in  itself  no  proof  that 
Irene  had  not  succeeded  on  the  stage.  A  more  important 
indication  is  that  neither  Garrick  nor  any  other  actor 
thought  of  reviving  it  during  Johnson’s  lifetime.  Nor,  it 
would  appear,  has  it  ever  been  acted  since,  though  when  it 
was  included  in  Bell’s  British  Theatre  it  was  adorned  with 
a  frontispiece  representing  Miss  Wallis  as  Aspasia — a  part 
which  she  is  not  known  to  have  played. 

Financially,  Johnson  had  no  reason  to  consider  Irene  a 
failure.  The  author  of  an  original  play  produced  at  Drury 
Lane  during  Garrick’s  management  was  given  the  receipts 
of  a  benefit  night  with  a  nominal  deduction  of  sixty  guineas 
for  the  expenses  of  the  house,  though  the  expenses  usually 
came  to  about  ninety.2  From  a  manuscript  note  by  Isaac 
Reed  printed  by  Malone  3  we  learn  that  after  the  theatre  had 
reserved  its  hundred  and  eighty  guineas  there  remained  for 
Johnson  as  his  profit  on  the  three  nights  £195  17s.  In  ad- 

1  Such  numbers  here  as  differ  from  those  given  in  Genest’s  English 
Stage  have  been  derived  from  the  advertisements  in  The  General 
Advertiser  and  The  Public  Advertiser. 

2  See  Garrick’s  letter  to  Smollett  of  26  November  1757,  printed  in 
Murphy’s  Life  of  Garrick,  1801,  ii,  pp.  299-800. 

3  Boswell’s  Life  of  Johnson,  6th  edition,  1811,  i,  p.  176.  The  note  was 
supplied  to  Malone,  the  editor  of  this  edition,  by  Alexander  Chalmers. 
The  receipts  for  the  three  benefit  nights  were  £177  Is.  6 d.,  £106  4s.  Od., 
and  £101  11s.  6d„  making  £384  17s.  Od.  in  all,  from  which  £189  0s.  0 d. 
had  to  be  deducted. 


52 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 


dition  lie  received  from  Dodsley  £100  for  the  copyright. 
After  twelve  years  of  disappointment  Irene  thus  at  last 
brought  Johnson  altogether  about  £300. 

Criticisms  of  Irene  immediately  appeared  in  periodicals 
and  pamphlets.  A  long  and  laudatory  letter  which  occupies 
more  than  a  column  of  The  General  Advertiser  of  18  February 
1749,  speaks  of  it  as  ‘the  best  Tragedy,  which  this  Age  has 
produced,  for  Sublimity  of  Thought,  Harmony  of  Numbers, 
Strength  of  Expression,  a  scrupulous  Observation  of  Dramatic 
Rules,  the  sudden  Turn  of  Events,  the  tender  and  generous 
Distress,  the  unexpected  Catastrophe,  and  the  extensive  and 
important  Moral  ’.  The  tone  of  the  whole  letter  and  such  a 
statement  as  ‘  all  who  admire  Irene  pay  a  Compliment  to  their 
own  Judgment’  suggest  that  it  was  written  with  more  than 
a  critical  purpose.  Garrick  probably  knew  something  about 
what  was  in.  effect  a  skilful  advertisement,  issued  at  a  time 
when  he  was  taking  other  means  to  ensure  a  third  benefit 
night.  A  more  impartial  but  equally  friendly  account  is  the 
‘  Plan  and  Specimens  of  Irene  ’  which  was  published  in  The 
Gentlemen’s  Magazine  for  February  when  the  play  had  been 
withdrawn.  It  gives  an  elaborate  analysis  of  the  plot,  and 
after  saying  that  ‘  to  instance  every  moral  which  is  inculcated 
in  this  performance  would  be  to  transcribe  the  whole  ’,  cites 
about  a  hundred  and  fifty  lines  with  high  praise.  The  play  is 
censured  in  respect  of  the  design  and  the  characters,  but  com¬ 
mended  for  the  justice  of  the  observations  and  the  propriety 
of  the  sentiments,  in  An  Essay  on  Tragedy,  with  a  Critical 
Examen  of  Mahomet  and  Irene,  an  ineffective  and  now  very 
rare  pamphlet  published  without  the  author’s  name  by  Ralph 
Griffiths  on  8  March.  Unfortunately  no  copy  appears  to  be 
now  known  of  A  Criticism  on  Mahomet  and  Irene.  In 
a  Letter  to  the  Author,  which,  according  to  announcements  in 
The  General  Advertiser,  was  ‘  printed  and  sold  by  W.  Reeve, 
in  Fleet-Street ;  and  A.  Dodd,  opposite  St.  Clement’s  Church, 
in  the  Strand  ’,  and  was  published  as  early  as  21  February. 

The  success  of  Irene  fell  far  below  Johnson’s  hopes,  but  he 
took  his  disappointment,  in  his  well-known  words,  ‘  like  the 
Monument’.  He  continued  to  think  well  of  what  cost  him  more 


53 


JOHNSON’S  IRENE 

labour  and  anxiety  than  any  other  work  of  the  same  size,  and 
at  least  five  quotations  in  the  Dictionary  (s.  v.  from,  important, 
imposture,  intimidate,  stagnant)  testify  to  his  parental  fond¬ 
ness.  Nor  did  he  come  to  agree  with  the  verdict  of  the 
public  till  late  in  life,  when,  on  hearing  part  of  it  read  out, 
he  admitted  that  he  ‘  thought  it  had  been  better  ’}  His  final 
judgement  is  clearly  indicated  in  The  Lives  of  the  Poets.  When 
he  said  in  the  Life  of  Prior  that  ‘  tediousness  is  the  most  fatal 
of  all  faults  ’  and  ‘  that  which  an  author  is  least  able  to  dis¬ 
cover  and  when  in  his  Life  of  Addison  he  drew  a  distinction 
between  a  poem  in  dialogue  and  a  drama,  and  added  that  the 
success  of  Cato  had  ‘  introduced  or  confirmed  among  us  the 
use  of  dialogue  too  declamatory,  of  unaft’ecting  elegance,  and 
chill  philosophy  ’,  we  cannot  but  think  that  he  remembered 
his  own  Irene. 

While  Irene  was  still  unacted,  Johnson  appears  to  have 
thought  of  writing  another  tragedy.  ‘  I  propose  ’,  he  said,  in 
a  letter  of  10  June  1742,  ‘  to  get  Charles  of  Sweden  ready  for 
this  winter,  and  shall  therefore,  as  I  imagine,  be  much  en¬ 
gaged  for  some  months  with  the  Dramatic  Writers.’ 2  Nothin? 

o 

more  is  heard  of  this  proposal.  Johnson’s  ‘  Charles  XII  ’ 
took  nobler  form  in  one  of  the  great  passages  of  The  Vanity 
of  Human  Wishes. 

David  Nichol  Smith. 

1  Life,  ed.  G.  B.  Hill,  iv,  p.  5.  2  Letters ,  i,  p.  11. 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


HE  Brontes  are  not  merely  historical  people  who  produced 


A  literature,  they  are  themselves  the  heroines  of  a  story 
written  partly  by  Mrs.  Gaskell  and  partly  by  Charlotte  and 
enacted  by  the  three  sisters  against  a  background  of  savage 
moorland  country  or  narrow  Belgian  life  and  always,  as  it 
seems,  beneath  stormy  or  weeping  skies.  Their  personalities 
have  the  completeness,  the  consistency,  the  perfect  congruity 
alike  with  the  background  against  which  they  stand,  and  with 
the  lives  they  led,  that  we  expect  in  great  works  of  art. 
They  have  the  immortality  of  the  creations  of  the  great 
masters  who  ‘  living  not  ’  1  can  ne’er  be  dead  ’.  Because  of 
this  one  shrinks  from  disturbing  that  enchanted  world  in 
which,  like  the  sleepers  in  Shelley’s  Witch  of  Atlas,  they  rest, 
'  age  after  age,  mute,  breathing,  beating,  warm,  and  undecay¬ 
ing  ’.  And  indeed  of  the  sisters  as  heroines  I  can  say  nothing 
that  has  not  already  been  said  far  better. 

I  am  going  to  attempt  the  perhaps  less  otiose  but  more 
ungracious  task  of  analysing  Charlotte  Bronte’s  artistic 
processes  and  estimating  in  cold  abstraction  from  her  perso¬ 
nality  the  value  of  her  writing,  her  place  in  the  history  of  the 
evolution  of  the  novel. 

To  Emily  and  Anne  I  shall  often  refer  in  so  far  as  they 
throw  light  on  their  elder  sister’s  development,  but  one 
may  suggest  in  passing  that  Emily  was  perhaps  a  greater 
literary  genius.  Her  characters  and  story  are  not  mere 
faintly  disguised  copies  of  the  people  she  has  met  or  of  what 
has  happened  to  herself,  and  this  power  of  invention — as 
Charlotte  recognized  in  criticizing  the  works  of  others — this 
power  of  making  one’s  self  the  ‘  instrument’  of  life  and  telling 
a  tale  not  verified  in  one’s  own  person,  is  proof  of  that  plurality 
of  latent  experience  which  is  perhaps  the  best  description  of 


genius. 


Now  the  foundation  of  most  of  Charlotte’s  work  is  simply 
her  own  life  and  character,  modified  in  the  case  of  Jane  Eyre 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE  55 

by  the  influence  of  certain  literary  models.  She  learned  her 
art  in  Jane  Eyre  and  that  book  was  used  itself  as  a  sort  of 
standard  and  pattern  in  its  two  successors.  It  is  with  this 
process  I  propose  to  deal. 

The  use  of  the  literary  model  is  almost  certainly  due  to 
M.  Heger’s  method  of  teaching  the  two  sisters.  Mrs.  Gaskell 
writes,  ‘  He  proposed  to  read  to  them  some  of  the  master¬ 
pieces  of  the  most  celebrated  French  authors  .  .  .  and  after 
having  thus  impressed  the  complete  effect  of  the  whole,  to 
analyse  the  parts  with  them,  pointing  out  in  what  such  and 
such  author  excelled,  and  where  were  the  blemishes’.  Then 
a  similar  theme  was  given  out  and  an  exercise  written  in 
imitation  of  the  model.  For  example,  one  day  he  read  to 
them  Victor  Hugo’s  Portrait  of  Mirabeau  and  then  dismissed 
them  to  choose  the  subject  of  a  similar  kind  of  portrait. 
Charlotte  Bronte’s  imitation  of  this  was  a  portrait  of  Peter 
the  Hei'mit.  When  M.  Heger  had  explained  his  plan  of 
instruction  to  the  Brontes,  he  asked  for  their  comments. 
‘  Emily  spoke  first ;  and  said,  that  she  saw  no  good  to  be 
derived  from  it;  and  that  by  adopting  it  they  should  lose 
all  originality  of  thought  and  expression.’  Charlotte  also 
doubted,  but  was  willing  to  try,  and  it  is  clear  that  the  plan 
was  adhered  to,  in  spite  of  Emily’s  objections.  It  seems 
probable  that  Charlotte  was  convinced  of  its  value :  she 
appears  to  have,  as  it  were,  got  herself  going  in  the  compo¬ 
sition  of  Jane  Eyre  in  something  this  way.  Remember 
Lucy  Snowe’s  description  of  her  method.  ‘  When  Paul 
dictated  the  trait  on  which  the  essay  was  to  turn  ...  I  had 
no  material  for  its  treatment.  But  I  got  books,  read  of  the 
facts,  laboriously  constructed  a  skeleton  out  of  the  dry  bones 
of  the  real,  and  then  clothed  them  and  tried  to  breathe  into 
them  life.’ 

The  earliest  written  of  the  novels  we  now  possess  was  The 
Professor  (this  qualification  is  necessary,  for  Charlotte,  like 
her  sisters,  appears  to  have  written  hundreds  of  stories, 
beginning  in  her  extreme  youth).  It  was  not  printed  till  two 
years  after  her  death  (1857),  but  it  had  gone  the  round  of 
most  of  the  publishing  houses  ten  years  before,  while  its 


56 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


creator  was  engaged  on  Jane  Eyre.  No  publisher  would  take 
it,  but  one  criticized  it  with  courtesy  and  insight,  and  expressed 
a  wish  to  see  a  three-volume  novel  from  the  same  hand. 
The  publishers  appear  to  have  complained  of  ‘  want  of  varied 
interest’;  and  Charlotte  Bronte  writes  that  she  has  en¬ 
deavoured  to  impart  a  ‘  more  vivid  interest  ’  to  Jane  Eyre. 
This  more  vivid  interest  was  given  by  crossing,  as  it  were,  her 
own  experience  with  stories  she  had  heard  or  read,  the  chief 
being  Richardson’s  Pamela. 

Jane  is  a  nursery  governess  and  her  social  position  as  such 
is  nearly  indistinguishable  from  that  of  Pamela  as  waiting- 
woman  to  Mr.  B.’s  mother.  Both  habitually  talk  of  the  hero 
as  ‘  my  Master  ’  and  are  sent  for  to  his  presence.  There  is  no 
doubt  that  part  of  the  success  of  Jane  Eyre ,  as  of  Pamela, 
was  due  to  the  romance  of  the  rise  of  the  heroine  in  social 
position.  Mrs.  Fairfax  corresponds  closely  to  Mrs.  Jervis — 
the  housekeeper  who  befriends  Pamela.  The  house-party 
with  the  egregious  Miss  Ingram  has  a  parallel  in  the  party 
which  comes  to  dine  and  inspect  Pamela,  and  in  Mr.  B.’s 
sister  who  objects  to  the  marriage.  Rochester  plans  and  nearly 
carries  through  a  sham  marriage  with  Jane,  and  Mr.  B. 
plots  a  sham  marriage.  Many  of  the  scenes  correspond 
exactly,  and  it  is  amazing  how  many  little  points  are  repro¬ 
duced.  For  example,  in  Pamela  one  of  the  servants  who 
wishes  Pamela  well  and  cannot  get  access  to  her,  disguises 
himself  as  a  gipsy,  and,  pretending  to  tell  fortunes,  brings  her 
a  letter  warning  her  about  the  mock-marriage.  In  Jane 
Eyre  Rochester  disguises  himself  as  a  gipsy  and,  pretending 
to  tell  Jane’s  fortune,  hints  at  the  truth  of  his  position.  One 
tiny  point  is  significant  of  the  method.  In  Pamela  the  gipsy 
wishes  to  draw  Pamela’s  attention  to  the  fact  that  she  is  going 
to  hide  the  letter  in  the  grass,  since  she  dare  not  give  it  to  her 
then.  She  does  it  thus :  ‘  O  !  said  she,  I  cannot  tell  your 
fortune  :  your  hand  is  so  white  and  fine,  I  cannot  see  the 
lines :  but  said  she,  and  stooping,  pulled  up  a  little  tuft  of 
grass,  I  have  a  way  for  that :  and  so  rubbed  my  hand  with 
the  mould  part  of  the  tuft :  Now,  said  she,  I  can  see  the  lines.’ 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


57 


In  Jane  Eyre  Rochester  disguised  as  a  gipsy  asks  for  Jane’s 
hand,  and  then  says,  ‘  It  is  too  fine  ...  I  can  make  nothing  of 
such  a  hand  as  that ;  almost  without  lines ;  besides  what  is 
in  a  palm  ?  Destiny  is  not  written  there.’ 

There  are  five  important  interviews  between  Jane  and 
Rochester,  after  their  relations  have  become  intimate,  in 
which  the  love-story  finds  expression.  These  are  :  Firstly,  the 
walk  in  the  garden  at  dawn  after  the  night  in  which  Mason 
was  attacked  by  his  mad  sister.  They  sit  in  an  arbour 
together  and  lie  tells  her  his  story,  but  in  obscure  language, 
and  tries  to  get  her  to  approve  the  course  he  intends  to  take — 
that  of  ignoring  his  marriage  and  uniting  himself  with  her. 
Then  there  is  a  scene  in  the  orchard  late  at  night,  in  which 
Rochester  proposes.  Thirdly,  there  is  the  long  conversation 
the  night  after  the  interrupted  marriage  in  which  Rochester 
tries  to  get  her  to  live  with  him  as  his  mistress.  Lastly,  we 
have  the  two  interviews  at  Ferndean.  In  the  first,  Jane,  after 
her  long  journey,  is  introduced  by  the  housekeeper  and  finds 
her  master  blind  and  ill.  The  final  proposal  is  made  when 
they  are  out  walking. 

Now  each  of  these  is  developed  out  of  similar  incidents  in 
Pamela.  Pamela  has  interviews  with  Mr.  B.  in  the  garden 
and  in  an  arbour.  He  consults  her  as  to  the  desirability  of  his 
marrying,  and  on  one  of  these  occasions  she  believes  him  to 
be  aiming  at  a  sham  marriage,  as  Rochester  really  is  in  the 
orchard  scene.  The  scene  at  midnight  after  the  interrupted 
marriage  corresponds  to  the  elaborate  proposals  sent  by  Mr.  B. 
to  Pamela,  if  she  will  live  with  him  as  his  mistress.  Again, 
Jane’s  meeting  with  Rochester  at  Ferndean  is  paralleled  by 
Pamela’s  return  when  she  hears  that  Mr.  B.  is  ill,  and  by  her 
interview  with  him,  introduced  by  Mrs.  Jewkes.  Lastly, 
Pamela’s  marriage  is  decided  on  during  a  long  drive  she  takes 
with  her  master,  just  as  Rochester’s  successful  proposal  is 
made  during  a  walk. 

It  is  true  that  the  mad  wife  was  unknown  to  Richardson. 
His  obtuse  moral  sense  saw  no  difficulty  in  rewarding  Pamela 
with  the  hand  of  the  man  who  had  tried  every  possible  way 
of  ruining  her,  and  whose  own  selfishness  was  the  only  barrier 


58 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


to  marriage  with  her.  Charlotte  Bronte  had  to  find  a  fairly 
adequate  excuse  for  Rochester.  Mrs.  Gaskell  thinks  that 
a  local  story  was  the  source  for  this  part  of  the  plot.  But 
the  whole  incident  is  coloured  by  the  practice  of  Mrs.  Radcliffe 
and  her  school.  In  The  Sicilian  Romance  the  heroine’s 
wicked  Father,  in  order  to  marry  a  lady  with  whom  he  has 
fallen  in  love,  keeps  his  wife  shut  up  for  years  in  an  under¬ 
ground  apartment.  It  is  this  episode  which  is  the  mainspring 
of  the  satire  in  Northanger  Abbey  (one  remembers  that 
Charlotte  Bronte  did  not  care  for  Jane  Austen’s  novels). 
Catherine  Morland  being  excluded,  as  she  thinks,  with  guilty 
care  from  the  rooms  of  her  host’s  late  wife,  makes  up  her  mind 
that  the  lady  still  lives  a  prisoner  in  the  Abbey.  The  general 
sends  his  daughter  and  guest  to  bed,  but  announces  that  he 
must  sit  up  to  read  pamphlets.  ‘  To  be  kept  up  for  hours  by 
stupid  pamphlets  was  not  very  likely.  There  must  be  some 
deeper  cause :  something  was  to  be  done  which  could  be  done 
only  while  the  household  slept ;  and  the  probability  that 
Mrs.  Tilney  yet  lived  shut  up  for  causes  unknown,  and 
receiving  from  the  pitiless  hands  of  her  husband  a  nightly 
supply  of  coarse  food,  was  the  conclusion  which  necessarily 
followed.’ 

We  come  upon  other  traces  of  Mrs.  Radcliffe’s  methods  in 
Villette.  The  ghostly  nun,  who  turns  out  to  be  Genevra, 
Fanshawe’s  lover,  masquerading,  is  in  Mi's.  Radcliffe’s  worst 
manner.  Charlotte  Bronte  uses  the  nun  to  give  a  romantic 
eeriness  at  various  points,  of  which  the  most  impressive  is  in 
the  explanation  between  Lucy  and  Mr.  Paul  in  the  Allde 
ddfendue.  The  chapter  ends :  ‘  with  a  sort  of  angry  rush — 
close,  close  past  our  faces — swept  swiftly  the  very  nun  herself. 
Never  had  I  seen  her  so  clearly.  She  looked  tall  of  stature, 
and  fierce  of  gesture.  As  she  went  the  wind  rose  sobbing ; 
the  rain  poured  wild  and  cold ;  the  whole  night  seemed  to 
feel  her.’  When  we  find  that  this  apparition  is  a  particularly 
silly  man  whose  masquerading  effects  nothing,  we  are  outraged. 

Scott  in  the  Lives  of  the  Novelists  criticizes  severely  this 
weakness  of  the  School  of  Terror,  but  he  himself  offended  in 
the  same  way,  and,  as  Charlotte  Bronte  admired  him  above  all 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


59 


other  novelists  he  may  have  been  her  model  here.  There 
seem  always  to  have  been,  in  her  at  least,  and  probably  in 
Emily  also,  two  divergent  tendencies — the  one  towards  minute 
and  very  accurate  realism,  and  the  other  to  what  Mrs.  Gaskell 
characterizes  as  ‘  wild,  weird  writing’  ‘to  the  very  borders  of 
delirium  ’.  She  gives  an  example  of  this  and,  apparently 
a  little  shocked,  suggests  that  it  may  have  some  allegorical  or 
political  reference : 

It  is  well  known  that  the  Genii  have  declared  that  unless 
they  perform  certain  arduous  duties  every  year,  of  a  mysterious 
nature,  all  the  worlds  in  the  firmament  will  be  burned  up,  and 
gathered  together  in  one  mighty  globe,  which  will  roll  in  solitary 
grandeur  through  the  vast  wilderness  of  space,  inhabited  only 
by  the  high  princes  of  the  Genii,  till  time  shall  be  succeeded  by 
Eternity  .  .  .  that  by  their  magic  might  they  can  reduce  the 
world  to  a  desert,  the  purest  waters  too  streams  of  livid  poison, 
and  the  clearest  lakes  to  stagnant  waters,  the  pestilential  vapours 
of  which  shall  slay  all  living  creatures,  except  the  blood-thirsty 
beast  of  the  forest,  and  the  ravenous  bird  of  the  rock. 

This  way  of  writing  is  the  source  of  the  romantic  glamour 
which  runs  through  all  Charlotte’s  works,  and  leads  her,  for 
example,  in  Shirley ,  to  amazing  bombastic  passages ;  but,  as 
I  hope  to  show  later,  it  was  a  necessary  part  of  the  full 
expression  of  her  genius.  This  sort  of  thing  is  not  traceable 
to  Scott,  but  owes  no  doubt  much  to  Southey’s  epics  and  also 
something  to  Beckford’s  Vathelc.  One  cannot  help  feeling 
that  a  better  image  of  the  fiery  hunger  of  the  Brontes’  natures, 
of  which  they  were  themselves  so  acutely  conscious,  could  not 
be  found  than  Beckford’s  picture  of  the  condemned  beings 
who  wander  for  ever  through  nightmare  halls  with  their 
hands  pressed  to  their  flaming  hearts.  That  Vathelc  ran  in 
Charlotte’s  mind  is  proved,  I  think,  by  her  misleading 
appreciation  of  the  character  of  HeathclifF  in  Wuthering 
Heights.  ‘  HeathclifF’,  she  says,  ‘  betrays  one  solitary  human 
feeling,  and  that  is  not  his  love  for  Catherine  ;  which  is 
a  sentiment  fierce  and  inhuman ;  a  passion  such  as  might  boil 
and  glow  in  the  bad  essence  of  some  evil  genius ;  a  fire  that 
might  form  the  tormented  centre — the  ever-sufFering  soul  of 


60 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


a  magnate  of  the  infernal  world :  and  by  its  quenchless  and 
ceaseless  ravage  effect  the  execution  of  the  decree  which 
dooms  him  to  carry  Hell  with  him  wherever  he  wanders  .  .  . 
we  should  say  he  was  child  neither  of  Lascar  nor  gipsy,  but 
a  man’s  shape  animated  by  demon  life — a  Ghoul — an  Afreet.’ 
Now  this  passage  gives  the  impression  of  volcanic  force  in 
the  passions  of  Emily’s  characters,  but  it  is  untrue  and  unfair 
to  Emily’s  art.  However  true  it  may  be  that  Withering 
Heights  grew  out  of  the  early  fantastic  tales  imagined  by 
Emily,  she  has  explained  carefully  how  Heathcliff  came  to  be 
what  he  was.  It  is  the  result  of  the  strange  vicissitudes  of 
his  childhood,  fostered  by  the  forbidding  countryside  in 
which  he  grew  up.  In  one  of  her  poems  we  see  her  turning 
from  the  fantastic — which  always  kept  its  hold  on  Charlotte — 
to  the  stronger  source  of  inspiration  in  her  own  nature : 

To-day  I  will  seek  not  the  shadowy  region  ; 

Its  unsustaining  vastness  waxes  drear ; 

And  visions  rising,  legion  after  legion, 

Bring  the  unreal  world  too  strangely  near. 

I’ll  walk,  but  not  in  old  heroic  traces, 

And  not  in  paths  of  high  morality, 

And  not  among  the  half-distinguished  faces, 

The  clouded  forms  of  long-past  history. 

I’ll  walk  where  my  own  nature  would  be  leading  : 

It  vexes  me  to  choose  another  guide  : 

Where  the  grey  flocks  in  ferny  glens  are  feeding ; 

Where  the  wild  wind  blows  on  the  mountain  side. 

What  have  those  lonely  mountains  worth  revealing? 

More  glory  and  more  grief  than  I  can  tell : 

The  earth  that  wakes  one  human  heart  to  feeling 
Can  centre  both  the  worlds  of  Heaven  and  Hell. 

To  return  to  Jane  Eyre.  Starting  from  the  story  of  the 
first  of  the  four  volumes  of  Richardson’s  Pamela,  Charlotte 
Bronte’s  task  was  to  make  a  three-volume  novel  of  this 
material  and  to  create  a  sympathetic  and  really  virtuous 
heroine,  and  a  hero  who  shall  attempt  an  illegal  union — one 
becomes  pedantic  in  Charlotte  Bronte’s  company — and  yet 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


61 


seem  not  unworthy  of  the  heroine’s  devotion.  Pamela,  whose 
one  real  gift  is  beauty,  and  who  is  attracted  to  Mr.  B.  solely 
by  his  wealth  and  position,  is  a  designing  minx.  As  Birrell 
puts  it,  she  ‘  was  always  read)-  to  marry  anybody’s  son,  only 
she  must  have  the  marriage  lines  to  keep  in  her  desk  to  show 
to  her  dear  parents  ’.  Charlotte  Bronte  had  to  make  us 
respect  a  girl  who  allowed  herself  to  fall  in  love  with  a  man 
who  had  no  intention  of  marrying  her,  and  ultimately  gave 
herself  to  him. 

Now  this  was  attained  largely  by  making  the  heroine’s 
atti’action  for  the  hero  to  be  character  and  intellect — not 
beauty.  She  had  told  her  sisters  that  they  ‘  were  wrong — 
even  morally  wrong — to  make  their  heroines  beautiful  as 
a  matter  of  course  ’.  In  a  story  like  Jane  Eyre  it  might  have 
been  so,  because  it  would  have  involved  weakness — sensuality 
— in  the  hero.  The  task  therefore  which  she  set  herself  was 
to  give,  by  dialogue  chiefly,  the  impression  of  charm.  Jane 
wins  Rochester  by  her  courage,  truthfulness,  l’esource,  trust¬ 
worthiness,  but  she  keeps  him  by  her  wit.  On  the  other 
hand,  when  the  book  was  first  published,  Jane’s  passionate 
desire  to  be  loved  was  thought  to  be  ‘  indelicate  ’,  even  ‘  coarse  ’. 
It  seems  probable  that  the  author — whose  advice  on  love  and 
marriage  in  her  letters  is  extremely  early  Victorian — must 
have  perceived  the  danger  of  this  beforehand. 

She  met  it  by  the  account  of  the  unhappy  childhood.  The 
passionate  misery  of  the  orphan  not  only  explains  the  love- 
hunger  but  raises  in  the  reader  a  strong  desire  to  see  her  come 
into  her  kingdom — it  gets  in  fact  the  effect  of  a  peripety. 
But  the  space  devoted  to  the  childhood  enabled  her  to  give 
a  full-length  portrait  of  the  heroine,  and  since  for  that  there 
was  no  material  in  Pamela,  she  was  thrown  back  on  her 
second  source,  her  own  experience.  It  is  an  admitted  fact  that 
all  the  scenes  at  the  school  are  bitter  but  accurate  pictures  of 
the  institution  where  four  of  the  Bronte  children  spent  some 
time  and  which  two  of  them  left  only  to  die.  Aunt  Reed  and 
her  unpleasant  offspring, one  judges  by  the  close  correspondence 
to  pictures  in  Anne’s  books,  are  portraits  of  households  in 
which  one  or  other  of  the  Bronte  sisters  suffered  as  aovernesses. 

O 


62 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


It  has  not,  I  think,  been  pointed  out  so  often  that  the  third 
part  of  the  book — that  is  to  say,  from  the  flight  from  Thorn- 
field  to  the  return  to  the  blind  Rochester — the  relations  in 
fact  with  the  Rivers  family — appears  to  be  taken  from 
Charlotte’s  relations  with  the  Nussey  family.  Henry  Nussey, 
a  clergyman,  proposed  to  Charlotte.  Charlotte’s  answer,  as 
well  as  what  she  says  on  the  subject  to  her  dear  friend — her 
suitor’s  sister — show  that  his  offer,  like  that  of  St.  John 
Rivers,  was  scarcely  that  of  a  lover.  ‘  He  intimates  ’,  says 
Charlotte  to  his  sister,  ‘  that  in  due  time  he  should  want 
a  wife  to  take  care  of  his  pupils,  and  frankly  asks  me  to  be 
that  wife.’  Compare  with  this  Jane’s  account  to  Diana  of 
her  brother’s  views  in  seeking  her  in  marriage.  ‘  His  sole 
idea  in  proposing  to  me  is  to  procure  a  fitting  fellow 
labourer.  .  .  .’  ‘  He  has  again  and  again  explained  that  it  is 

not  himself,  but  his  office  he  wishes  to  mate.  He  has  told  me 
I  am  formed  for  labour,  not  for  love.’  We  see  by  the  com¬ 
parison  the  sort  of  modification  made  by  art.  Henry  Nussey ’s 
need  was  for  a  good  housekeeper,  to  his  own  economic  advan¬ 
tage,  it  might  be  felt ;  there  was  no  moral  compulsion  to  assist 
him,  though  she  speaks  of  gratitude  to  his  family.  St.  John 
desired  a  helper  for  his  cause,  a  sacrifice  to  be  laid  on  the  altar 
of  his  stern  Deity. 

On  the  whole  Miss  Bronte  was  equally  successful  in  dealing 
with  the  difficulty  of  the  hero’s  character.  Rochester  is  a 
sort  of  Mr.  B.  crossed  with  M.  Heger.  His  first  marriage 
is  represented  as  having  ruined  his  chances  of  innocent 
happiness,  the  faithlessness  of  Adhle’s  mother  completes  his 
disillusionment.  Further,  the  introduction  of  the  egregious 
St.John  Rivers  acts  as  a  foil :  we  are  ready  to  pardon  anything 
to  an  erring  but  passionate  human  being,  after  the  presence 
of  the  harsh  fanatic, 

The  structure  of  Jane  Eyre,  then,  appears  to  be  this.  We 
start  with  the  central  episode  of  what  may  be  termed 
Rochester’s  courtship  at  Thornfield  framed  on  the  model  of 
Mr.  B.’s  courtship  of  Pamela.  The  intellect  and  character  of 
Jane — her  passionate  love  and  yet  power  of  restraint — is 
what  raises  this  part  above  Richardson’s  novel.  Then  we  find 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE  63 

that  the  hungry,  unhappy  childhood  is  needed  to  explain  this 
character,  and  further  makes  us  feel  the  intensity  of  her  rest 
in  love.  But  both  our  sense  of  proportion  and  the  necessity 
of  making  us  respect  the  dramatis  personae  require  that  this 
period  of  happiness  should  work  up  to  a  climax  and  peripety 
(reversal  of  fortune),  and  be  followed  by  a  new  period  of  agony. 
Pamela  falls  to  pieces  because  the  marriage  takes  place  too 
soon,  and  what  follows  afterwards  is  merely  a  series  of  episodes. 
Jane  Eyre  has  the  structure  of  a  well-knit  drama.  The  days 
and  nights  of  physical  as  well  as  mental  starvation,  followed 
by  the  strange  persecution  of  St.  John,  from  whose  grasp  Jane 
escapes  as  by  a  miracle,  forms  exactly  the  preparation  we  need 
for  the  final  happiness,  intense  and  yet  subdued,  human  and 
yet  of  the  spirit.  Jane’s  character  which  has  held  the  book 
together  finds  its  consummation :  ‘  I  hold  myself  supremely 
blest  .  .  .  because  I  am  my  husband’s  life,  as  fully  as  he  is 
mine.  ...  To  be  together  is  for  us  to  be  at  once  as  free  as  in 
solitude,  as  gay  as  in  company.  We  talk,  I  believe,  all  day 
long:  to  talk  to  each  other  is  only  a  more  animated  way  of 
thinking.’ 

In  Shirley  Charlotte  Bronte  made  an  attempt  to  break 
away  from  her  own  inner  life,  but  the  extent  to  which  she 
relied  upon  immediate  and  particular  observation  is  nowhere 
more  obvious.  Shirley  and  Caroline  are  modelled  on  her 
sisters  Emily  and  Anne.  Her  deep  love  and  admiration  for 
Emily — dead  just  about  six  months  when  the  novel  appeared— 
enabled  her  to  portray  a  nature  essentially  unlike  her  own. 
That  inspiration  also  enabled  her  to  see  her  heroine  in 
circumstances  unlike  those  of  the  sad  reality — wealthy  and  in 
a  position  of  authority.  When,  however,  it  came  to  the  love- 
making  her  instinct  failed  her  completely.  Charlotte  Bronte 
apparently  could  not  believe  in  any  acceptable  lover,  who  was 
not  at  least  in  nature  a  schoolmaster.  Even  Rochester  has 
a  touch  of  it.  Shirley  has  been  made  so  real  to  us  that  her 
devotion  to  Louis — a  stick  at  best — is  merely  ludicrous. 

It  seems  to  me  just  possible  that  Louis  was  an  afterthought ; 
that  her  first  intention  was  to  give  Shirley  to  Robert  Moore 
and  to  let  Caroline  die  of  a  broken  heart.  But  the  shadow 


64  CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 

of  the  death  of  Anne  which  took  place  in  May  might  well 
alter  her  purpose.  Mrs.  Gaskell  tells  us  that  the  first  chapter 
written  after  Anne’s  death  was  the  24th — that  called  The 
Valley  of  the  Shadow — in  which  Caroline  goes  down  to  the 
gates  of  death,  but  returns.  Now  Louis  makes  his  first 

o  7 

appearance  in  the  preceding  chapter,  and  up  to  that  point  the 
way  has  been  prepared  for  the  gradual  decline  of  Caroline. 
It  would,  I  think,  have  been  a  greater  book,  if  the  author 
had  hardened  her  heart  and  gone  on.  But  to  use  in  a  work 
of  art  the  clear  impression  imprinted  by  the  agony  of  the 
death  of  the  prototype  would  naturally  repel  the  bereaved 
sister.  Moreover,  it  might  suggest  to  the  world,  should  the 
identity  of  the  Bells  be  discovered,  that  Anne  had  died  of 
unrequited  love.  The  idea  would  be  intolerable.  Never¬ 
theless  the  book  falls  to  pieces  because  of  this.  Miss  Sinclair 
remarks  on  the  difficulty  of  finding  your  way  about  in  it — of 
remembering  where  a  particular  scene  comes. 

You  discern  dimly  an  iron-grey  Northern  background  drawn 
with  strokes  hard  yet  blurred.  .  .  .  There  is  an  incessant  coming 
and  going  of  people  who  seem  to  have  lost  their  way  in  the 
twilight  too.  .  .  .  There  is  a  good  deal  of  confused  frame-breaking, 
about  which  you  do  not  care.  .  .  .  Presently  Louis  Moore  appears 
and  the  drama  miraculously  simplified  leaps  forward  and  be¬ 
comes  alive,  and  moves  forward  under  a  strong  but  unsteady 
light.  You  can  find  your  way  now. 

Now  this  does  give  the  general  impression  of  the  book,  and  it 
is  true  that  the  course  of  the  story  becomes  clear  when  Louis 
appears,  but  it  also  becomes  feeble — The  Family  Herald 
inverted.  Louis  is  a  male  Jane  Eyre,  or  rather  a  male 
Pamela,  he  even  has  Pamela’s  passion  for  ‘  papers  ’.  He  has 
none  of  Jane’s  wit  and  charm.  The  book  was  intended  to  be 
on  a  wide  canvas — to  give  the  truth  of  the  hard,  wild,  un¬ 
lovely  Yorkshire  world  with  its  splendidly  dreary  background 
of  the  moors.  To  depict  Emily  without  that  background  was 
simply  not  to  give  her  at  all.  Charlotte  Bronte  writes :  ‘  My 
sister  Emily  loved  the  moors.  Flowers  brighter  than  the 
rose  bloomed  in  the  blackest  of  the  heath  for  her — out  of 
a  sullen  hollow  in  a  livid  hill-side,  her  mind  could  make  an 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE  65 

Eden.  Mrs.  Gaskell  notes  that  Emily’s  physical  suffering 
when  away  from  Haworth  was  such  that  her  family  at  last 
acknowledged  that  whoever  left  home,  she  must  stay  there. 
It  is  significant,  then,  that  Louis’s  courtship  is  conducted 
entirely  in  the  house.  The  story  ought  to  have  worked  up 
to  a  crisis  in  grand  surroundings,  and  the  end  should  have 
been  mainly  gloom}7. 

To  her  first  three  books  Charlotte  Bronte  had,  with  per¬ 
haps  a  thought  of  sympathetic  magic,— or  a  desire  to  comfort 
herself,— given  a  happy  ending.  In  Villette  she  went  back 
to  herself  as  heroine,  and  was  thus  free  to  tell  her  tale  with¬ 
out  thinking  what  reflections  it  might  cast  on  those  dear  to 
her  ;  and  Villette  is  her  greatest  book  because  in  it  the 
essence  of  her  passionate,  gloomy  race  finds  expression.  Lucy 
Snowe’s  temperament  is  her  fate,  and  is  linked  with  the  stormy 
skies  and  seas  which  are  the  constant  background  of  her 
story  and  at  last  the  terrific  agent  of  her  doom.  The  author 
wrote  to  her  publishers  who  had  apparently  pled  for  happi¬ 
ness  for  Lucy  :  1  Lucy  must  not  marry  Dr.  John  ;  he  is  far 
too  youthful,  handsome,  bright-spirited,  and  sweet-tempered  ; 
he  is  a  “  curled  darling  ”  of  Nature  and  of  Fortune  ...  he 
must  be  made  very  happy  indeed.  If  Lucy  marries  anybody, 
it  must  be  the  Professor — a  man  in  whom  there  is  much  to 
forgive,  much  to  “put  up  with”.  But  I  am  not  leniently 
disposed  towards  Miss  Frost :  from  the  beginning  I  never 
meant  to  appoint  her  lines  in  pleasant  places  ’—a  fact  which 
ought  to  have  been  obvious  to  all.  Mr.  Bronte  too  pled  for 
a  happy  ending.  ‘  But  the  idea  of  M.  Paul  Emanuel’s  death 
at  sea  was  stamped  on  her  imagination  until  it  assumed  the 
distinct  force  of  reality.’ 

The  sound  of  wild  winds  and  gloomy  seas  pervades  the 
book,  and  metaphors  of  storms  at  sea  are  found  everywhere 
sometimes  rather  irrelevantly.  The  note  is  struck  early  on 
the  night  when  Miss  Marchmont  dies. 

I  had  wanted  to  compromise  with  Fate:  to  escape  occasional 
great  agonies  by  submitting  to  a  whole  life  of  privation  and 
small  pains.  Fate  would  not  so  be  pacified  :  nor  would  Provi¬ 
dence  sanction  this  shrinking  sloth  and  cowardly  indolence. 

2339-14 


66  CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 

One  February  night — I  remember  it  well — there  came  a  voice 
near  Miss  Marchmont’s  house,  heard  by  every  inmate,  but 
translated,  perhaps,  only  by  one.  .  .  .  The  wind  was  wailing  at 
the  windows :  it  had  wailed  all  day  ;  but  as  night  deepened,  it 
took  a  new  tone — an  accent  keen,  piercing,  almost  articulate 
to  the  ear ;  a  plaint,  piteous  and  disconsolate  to  the  nerves, 
trilled  in  every  gust.  ‘  Oh,  hush  !  hush !  ’  I  said  in  my  dis¬ 
turbed  mind,  dropping  my  work,  and  making  a  vain  effort  to 
stop  my  ears  against  that  subtle,  searching  cry.  I  had  heard 
that  very  voice  ere  this,  and  compulsory  observation  had  forced 
on  me  a  theory  as  to  what  it  boded.  Three  times  in  the  course 
of  my  life  events  had  taught  me  that  these  strange  accents  in 
the  storm — this  ruthless,  hopeless  cry — denote  a  coming  state 
of  the  atmosphere  unpropitious  to  life. 

The  personality  of  the  author  is  divided  between  Lucy 
Snowe  and  Paulina,  which  accounts  for  the  introduction  of 
the  latter  at  the  very  beginning.  Paulina’s  misery  on  parting 
from  her  father,  and  again  at  the  indifference  of  Graham, 
gives  out  the  theme  of  heart-sickness  that  is  to  be  the  subject 
of  the  book.  Incidentally  we  notice  that  its  effect,  like  the 
parallel  arrangement  in  Jane  Eyre,  is  to  give  us  a  satisfaction 
in  Paulina’s  marriage  to  Dr.  John  which  would  otherwise  be 
very  feeble.  But  this  is  quite  subordinate,  the  main  intention 
of  the  book  is  tragic.  Miss  Sinclair  thinks  that  ‘  the  marvel¬ 
lous  chapters  which  tell  of  Polly’s  childhood  are  manifestly 
the  prologue  to  a  tragedy  of  which  she  is  the  unique  heroine  ’, 
and  that  there  had  been  a  shifting  of  intention.  A  careful 
study  of  Charlotte  Bronte’s  method  leads  me  to  disagree. 
The  subject  of  the  book  is  heart-hunger,  the  inevitable 
parting  of  all  who  love.  Lucy  Snowe  is  to  be  as  it  were  the 
organ  which  will  take  up  the  theme,  but  it  is  first  given  out 
by  the  child  Paulina,  and  by  the  story  of  Miss  Marchmont. 
Lucy  Snowe  herself  appears  out  of  a  storm  of  misfortune,  an 
incarnation  of  affliction.  ‘  I  too  well  remember  a  time — a  long 
time — of  cold,  of  danger,  of  contention.  To  this  hour  when 
I  have  the  nightmare,  it  repeats  the  rush  and  saltness  of 
briny  waves  in  my  throat,  and  thin  icy  pressure  on  my 
lungs.  .  .  .  For  many  days  and  nights  neither  sun  nor  stars 
appeared ;  we  cast  with  our  hands  the  tackling  out  of  the 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


67 


ship ;  a  heavy  tempest  lay  on  us  ;  all  hope  that  we  should  be 
saved  was  taken  away.’  That  is  our  real  introduction  to 
her.  We  know  nothing  about  her  previous  history.  One 
notices  that  for  the  first  time  the  hero  or  heroine  does  not 
give  the  name  to  the  book.  Grief  is  the  hero.  The  Professor 
is  the  manifest  germ  of  Villette,  though  the  rather  colourless 
hero  has  no  link  with  Paul  Emanuel.  He  is  a  male  Lucy 
Snowe.  But  Madame  Beck  is  foreshadowed  in  Mile.  Reuter. 
The  appearance  of  the  school  itself :  the  Allde  dbfendue  with 
the  Professor’s  window  in  the  boys’  school  looking  out  on  it ; 
the  intolerable  minxes,  who  make  the  first  lesson  a  terror 
to  Lucy  Snowe,  recall  the  situation  with  which  the  male 
Professor  has  to  deal,  and  Lucy  deals  with  the  situation  in  the 
same  way,  tearing  up  the  minx’s  exercise  before  the  class. 
But  the  dullness  of  which  publishers  had  complained  in  The 
Professor  is  relieved  partly  by  the  sheer  intensity  of  emotion, 
and  partly  by  Charlotte  Bronte’s  greatest  creation,  M.  Paul. 
He  lives — one  would  swear  one  had  seen  him.  It  was  a 
stroke  of  genius  to  make  him  ludicrous.  For  the  mate  of 
a  heroine  she  loved  perhaps  she  would  not  have  dared  to  do 
it :  we  owe  M.  Paul  to  the  fact  that  Lucy  Snowe  is  the 
embodiment  of  what  was  ominous  in  her  own  character,  and 
she  did  not  love  her.  Dr.  John  was  admittedly  drawn  from 
the  publisher  Mr.  Smith.  One  imagines  that  M.  Paul  may 
have  taken  some  traits  from  his  subordinate  Mr.  Taylor,  who 
wished  to  marry  Charlotte  Bronte  and  whom  she  talks  of 
with  gratitude  and  kindliness,  but  also  with  a  faint  tone  of 
amusement,  and  generally  with  the  epithet  ‘  little  ’.  Great 
art  is  not  so  much  1  emotion  recollected  ’  as  encased  ‘  in  tran¬ 
quillity  ’.  Her  detachment  from  the  model  gave  the  author 
the  necessary  calmness  of  perception  :  the  element  of  laughter 
in  which  M.  Paul  is  portrayed  gives  him  his  vitality.  The 
scenes  in  which  his  generosity  is  dwelt  on,  might  have  been 
written  by  any  one  and  almost  of  any  character.  M.  Paul 
lives  because  of  three  scenes  in  which  he  is  childishly  vain, 
touchy,  prying,  ridiculous.  There  is  the  evening  reading, 
when  because  Lucy  moves  a  little  away  from  him  he  clears 
the  whole  long  table  and  sets  her  at  one  end  and  himself  at 


68 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 


the  other.  Still  better  is  the  scene  on  the  occasion  of  his 
fete.  The  little  man  hidden  behind  the  pyramid  of  nosegays 
and  awaiting  in  vain  Lucy’s  addition  to  his  triumph  has  an 
intense  pathos  and  life,  because  we  never  identify  ourselves 
with  him.  But  perhaps  best  of  all  is  the  reconciliation. 
Lucy  finds  him  prying  in  her  desk,  and  he  pleads  with  her 
that  she  might  have  spent  a  few  centimes  on  a  gift  for  him. 
She  produces  a  little  sweetmeat  box  and  a  watch-guard  which 
she  has  made  for  him.  1  He  took  out  the  chain— a  trifle 
indeed  as  to  value,  but  glossy  with  silk  and  sparkling  with 
beads.  He  liked  that  too — admired  it  artlessly,  like  a  child.’ 
Then,  having  ascertained  that  it  had  always  been  intended 
for  him,  ‘  straightway  Monsieur  opened  his  paletot,  arranged 
the  guard  splendidly  across  his  chest,  displaying  as  much  and 
suppressing  as  little  as  he  could,  for  lie  had  no  notion  of  con¬ 
cealing  what  he  admired  and  thought  decorative  ’. 

But  the  true  greatness  of  the  book  is  that  here  Charlotte 
expresses  fully  the  tormented  agony  of  soul  of  the  Bronte 
sisters — agony  of  living  beings  as  it  were  imprisoned  in 
vacuity.  One  remembers  the  description  of  Jane  Eyre  as 
she  paces  the  gallery  in  Mr.  Rochester’s  house  before  her 
love-story  has  begun. 

The  restlessness  was  in  my  very  nature  ;  it  agitated  me  to 
pain  sometimes.  Then  my  sole  relief  was  to  walk  along  the 
corridor  of  the  third  story,  backwards  and  forwards  .  .  .  and 
allow  my  mind’s  eye  to  dwell  on  whatever  bright  visions  rose 
before  it  ...  to  let  my  heart  be  heaved  by  the  exultant  move¬ 
ment,  which  while  it  swelled  it  in  trouble  expanded  it  with 
life  ;  and  best  of  all  to  open  my  inward  ear  to  a  tale  that  was 
never  ended — a  tale  my  imagination  created,  and  narrated  con¬ 
tinuously  ;  quickened  with  all  of  incident,  life,  fire,  feeling,  that 
I  desired  and  had  not  in  my  actual  existence. 

Accurate  truth  to  life  had  always  been  Charlotte’s  artistic 
ideal.  ‘The  Bells’,  she  writes  in  1848,  ‘are  very  sincere  in 
their  worship  of  Truth,  and  they  hope  to  apply  themselves  to 
the  consideration  of  Art,  so  as  to  attain  one  day  the  power 
of  speaking  the  language  of  conviction  in  the  accents  of 
persuasion  ;  though  they  rather  apprehend  that,  whatever 


CHARLOTTE  BRONTE  69 

pains  they  take  to  modify  and  soften,  an  abrupt  word  or 
vehement  tone  will  now  and  then  occur  to  startle  ears  polite.’ 
The  fact  was  that  her  emotions  were  so  intense,  in  spite  of 
the  humdrum  quality  of  the  external  incidents  of  her  life, 
that  this  truth  to  life  involved  the  inclusion  of  a  poetic 
quality.  She  speaks  almost  with  dislike  of  Jane  Austen. 
‘  What  sees  keenly,  speaks  aptly,  moves  flexibly,  it  suits  her 
to  study ,  but  what  the  blood  rushes  through,  what  is  the 
unseen  seat  of  life  and  the  sentient  target  of  death — this 
Miss  Austen  ignores.’  And  again  to  Lewis,  ‘  Miss  Austen 
being  as  you  say,  without  “  sentiment”,  without  poetry,  may¬ 
be  is  sensible,  real  (more  real  than  true),  but  she  cannot  be 
gi’eat  ’. 

To  express  herself,  then,  it  was  necessary  somehow  to  give 
utterance  to  the  poetic  quality  in  her.  In  the  earlier  books 
this  was  undoubtedly  a  source  of  weakness.  It  was  apt  to 
produce  purple  patches  of  the  worst  description.  It  found 
voice  in  those  terrible  *  devoirs  ’  of  Shirley  and  Mile.  Henri ; 
in  Jane  Eyre’s  ‘pictures’;  in  personifications;  and  is  re¬ 
sponsible  probably  for  the  scene  with  the  nun  to  which 
I  referred  above.  But  for  the  most  part  Villette  is  free  of 
this  vice  because  in  it  the  temperament  of  Lucy  Snowe  and 
her  agonies  of  loneliness  and  melancholy  become  a  perfect 
vehicle  for  this  pressure  of  feeling.  The  subject  of  the  agony 
of  a  soul  yearning  for  an  object,  for  a  mate,  and  condemned 
to  perpetual  disappointment,  to  perpetual  imprisonment  in 
vacuity,  not  only  welds  all  the  incidents  in  the  book  together 
in  the  white  heat  of  a  passionate  consciousness,  but  afforut, 
constant  opportunities  for  that  uprush  of  emotion  which  had 
done  so  much  wrong  to  her  art  in  earlier  works.  It  is  true 
that  the  greatest  passages  are  spoilt  by  the  irritating  trick  of 
verbal  inversion — a  trick  learned  perhaps  from  De  Quincey, 
whose  Vision  of  Sudden  Death  had  appeared  in  1849,  when  it 
was  only  too  likely  to  come  home  to  Charlotte  Bronte.  But  apart 
from  that,  De  Quincey’s  influence  was  probably  for  good — he 
taught  Charlotte  Bronte  how  to  utter  the  vague  and  yet  over¬ 
whelming  sorrows  of  her  heart.  The  following  passage  gives 
poignantly  the  sense  of  a  gloom  sublime  in  its  intensity,  and 


70  CHARLOTTE  BRONTE 

rising  out  of  the  general  atmosphere  and  theme  of  the  tale, 
as  a  stormy  wind  grows  gradually  to  a  climax  of  frenzy  : 

About  this  time  the  Indian  summer  closed  and  the  equinoctial 
storms  began ;  and  for  nine  dark  and  wet  days,  of  which  the 
hours  rushed  on  all  turbulent,  deaf,  dishevelled — bewildered 
with  sounding  hurricane — I  lay  in  a  strange  fever  of  the  nerves 
and  blood.  Sleep  went  quite  away.  I  used  to  rise  in  the  night, 
look  round  for  her,  beseech  her  earnestly  to  return.  A  rattle 
of  the  window,  a  cry  of  the  blast  only  replied.  Sleep  never 
came. 

I  err.  She  came  once,  but  in  anger.  .  .  .  By  the  clock  of 
St.  Jean  Baptiste,  that  dream  remained  scarce  15  minutes — 
a  brief  space,  but  sufficing  to  wring  my  whole  frame  with  un¬ 
known  anguish  ;  to  confer  a  nameless  experience  that  had  the 
hue,  the  mien,  the  terror,  the  very  tone  of  a  visitation  from 
Eternity. 

The  external  history  of  Lucy  Snowe  is  neither  the  cause  of 
her  inner  experience,  nor  its  result,  but  merely  a  minor  varia¬ 
tion,  as  it  were,  on  the  same  theme.  This  gives  impersonality 
to  her  emotion.  At  last  Charlotte  Bronte  has  found  means  to 
transcend  the  bonds  of  the  individual.  This  latest  heroine, 
stripped  of  every  adornment  and  attraction,  destitute  even 
of  the  possession  of  tragic  affliction,  the  incarnation  of 
frustrated  desire,  becomes  the  mouthpiece  of  a  great  abstract 
flood  of  emotion  and  gives  utterance  to  the  Infinity  within 
her  creator.  The  intensity  of  pain  in  Villette  guarantees  its 
author’s  immortality. 

There  is  not  room  for  death. 


Janet  Spens. 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


1.  His  Tours  in  Wales 

BOTH  by  his  travels  and  his  works  Tennyson  is  associated 
with  Wales.  He  appears  to  have  made  his  first  visit  in 
1839,  at  a  time  when  he  was  still  labouring  under  the  burden 
of  sorrow  which  the  death  of  his  friend  Hallam  had  imposed 
upon  him.  At  all  times  a  lover  of  quiet  and  seclusion, 
Tennyson  was  then  in  greater  need  than  ever  of  peaceful 
solitude. 

On  this  tour  he  visited  Aberystwyth,  Barmouth,  and  Llan- 
beris.  His  account  of  Aberystwyth  is  not  enthusiastic,  though 
he  was  interested  to  see  the  quaint  costume  of  the  women  and 
to  hear  Welsh  spoken  about  him.  He  had  chanced  upon  a 
spell  of  serene  blue  skies,  golden  sunshine,  and  placid  waters. 
This  was  not  to  his  taste.  He  loved  the  ‘  much-sounding  sea  ’ 
and  was  disappointed  that  the  bay  of  Aberystwyth  did  not 
show  more  of  the  tempestuous  spirit  for  which  it  was  re¬ 
nowned.  Nor  was  he  more  fortunate  with  the  literature 
which  came  into  his  hands  during  his  stay.  He  appears  to 
have  stumbled  upon  T.  J.  L.  Prichard’s  poem  The  Land 
Beneath  the  Sea  and  was  moved  to  laughter  by  this  unin¬ 
spired  version  of  the  legend  of  Seithenyn.  It  is  tempting  to 
speculate  what  Tennyson  might  have  made  of  the  theme,  if 
it  had  come  to  his  notice  in  some  more  suggestive  form.  As 
it  was,  the  inspiration  which  Welsh  tradition  was  to  give 
him  sprang  from  a  different  source — the  deeds  of  Arthur  and 
his  knights. 

Weary  of  the  unchanging,  tranquil  sea,  Tennyson  involun¬ 
tarily  turned  his  thoughts  to  Mablethorpe  in  Lincolnshire, 
where  he  had  so  often  listened  to  the  booming  of  the  waves 
as  they  fell  on  the  shore.  What  he  had  longed  for  and  lacked 
at  Aberystwyth  he  found  at  Barmouth,  which  rose  corre¬ 
spondingly  in  his  esteem.  He  describes  it  as  ‘a  good  deal 
prettier  place  than  Aberystwyth,  a  flat  sand  shore,  a  sea 


72 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


with  breakers,  looking  Mablethorpe-like,  and  sand  hills,  and 
close  behind  them  huge  crags,  and  a  long  estuary  with  cloud- 
capt  hills  running  up  as  far  as  Dolgelley,  with  Cader  Idris  on 
one  side  ’.  But  more  than  anything  else  that  benny  son  saw 
on  this  tour  Llanberis  appealed  to  him,  and  remembering  the 
sombre  and  majestic  setting  of  the  mountain  lake,  as  yet 
undefiled  by  unsightly  heaps  of  refuse  from  the  slate  quarries, 
we  cannot  find  this  difficult  to  understand. 

By  the  time  that  Tennyson  made  his  second  tour  in  Wales, 
in  1856,  he  had  apparently  acquired  some  familiarity  with 
Welsh  song.  In  June  of  that  year,  when  confronted  with 
ruin,  owing  to  the  probable  failure  of  the  bank  in  which  his 
money  was  invested,  he  sought  consolation  in  the  stirring 
‘  War-March  of  Captain  Morgan  ’.  That  summer  he  returned 
to  his  old  haunts,  Barmouth  and  Dolgelley.  The  still 
pools  of  the  stream  in  the  Torrent  Walk  at  Dolgelley,  the 
mysterious  giant  steps  of  Cwm  Bychan,  and  ‘  the  high 
rejoicing  lines  of  Cader  Idris’  were  all  a  source  of  wonder 
and  delight.  His  wife  records  in  her  diary  how,  when  climb¬ 
ing  Cader  Idris,  he  was  caught  in  a  sudden  rainstorm, 
which  blotted  out  everything  from  the  family  anxiously 
waiting  below.  ‘  I  heard  the  roar  of  waters,  streams,  and 
cataracts  ’,  she  says,  ‘  and  I  never  saw  anything  more  awful 
than  that  great  veil  of  rain  drawn  straight  over  Cader  Idris, 
pale  light  at  the  lower  edge.  It  looked  as  if  death  were 
behind  it,  and  made  me  shudder  when  I  thought  he  was 
there.’  However,  Tennyson  sent  a  reassuring  message  by  his 
guide  and  ultimately  joined  his  family  in  safety.  Other 
places  visited  by  the  poet  were  Harlech,  Festiniog,  Llanidloes, 
Builth,  and  Caerleon.  The  last-named,  with  its  Roman  remains 
and  memories  of  Arthur,  made  a  deep  impression  on  Tennyson. 
In  a  letter  written  amid  the  quiet  of  this  ruined  shrine  of 
former  greatness,  he  says,  ‘  The  Usk  murmurs  by  my  windows, 
and  I  sit  like  King  Arthur  in  Caerleon  ’.  From  Caerleon 
excursions  were  made  to  Merthyr  Tydvil,  to  Raglan,  and  to 
Caerphilly,  and  then  the  party  returned  home  through  Brecon, 
Gloucester,  and  Salisbury. 

Twelve  years  later  Tennyson  again  came  to  Caerphilly  and 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  73 

also  visited  Chepstow  and  Tintern.  He  beheld  the  ruins  of 
the  old  abbey  and  the  expanse  of  the  surrounding  country 
at  much  the  same  season  as  Wordsworth  did  seventy  years 
before.  Through  the  bare  windows  of  the  abbey  he  saw  the 
golden  cornfields,  and,  as  he  climbed  an  adjacent  height, 
watched  the  Wye  force  its  way  past  bluffs  crowned  with 
dark  woods  towards  its  junction  with  the  Severn. 

In  1871  Tennyson  made  yet  another  tour  in  Wales,  this 
time  in  the  north.  Leaving  home  on  7  August,  he  broke  his 
journey  at  Wrexham  to  stay  with  Mr.  Archibald  Peel,  who 
had  enjoyed  his  friendship  for  some  twenty  years.  From 
here  he  went  on  to  Llanberis.  At  the  hotel  where  he  put  up, 
he  was  disturbed  by  the  dancing  of  a  jovial  party  in  the  room 
above  his  own,  and  in  a  letter  humorously  refers  to  the  inci¬ 
dent  : 

Dancing  above  was  heard,  heavy  feet  to  the  sound  of  a  light  air, 

Light  were  the  feet,  no  doubt,  but  floors  were  misrepresenting. 

Early  the  following  morning  Tennyson  set  out  from  Llan¬ 
beris  and  walked  through  Nant  Gwynant  to  Beddgelert.  He 
records  his  impressions  thus  : 

Walked  to  the  Yale  Gwynant,  Llyn  Gwynant  shone  very 
distant 

Touched  by  the  morning  sun,  great  mountains  glorying  o’er  it, 

Moel  Hebog  loom’d  out,  and  Siabod  tower’d  up  in  sether : 

Liked  Beddgelert  much,  flat  green  with  murmur  of  waters, 

Bathed  in  a  deep  still  pool  not  far  from  Pont  Aberglaslyn — 

(Ravens  croak’d,  and  took  white,  human  skin  for  a  lambkin). 

Then  we  I’eturned.  —  What  a  day  !  Many  more  if  fate  will 
allow  it. 

When  Tennyson  came  to  write  his  tales  of  Arthur  and  his 
knights,  the  landscapes  that  he  had  seen  in  Wales  would 
naturally  rise  before  his  eyes  and  form  the  background  of 
some  of  his  Idylls.  From  Malory  he  had  imbibed  the  idealized 
conception  of  a  feudal  ruler  whose  fame  for  bravery  and 
courtesy  had  spread  through  many  lands  and  whose  knights 
were  devoted  to  his  service.  Tennyson,  gazing  upon  the  ruins 
of  castles  raised  by  Norman  kings  and  nobles,  peopled  them 
with  visions  of  the  figures  that  he  had  come  to  love  in 


74 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


medieval  legend.  It  is  conceivable  that  such  a  castle  as  is 
described  in  The  Marriage  of  Geraint  is  a  reminiscence  of  his 
Welsh  tours : 

Then  rode  Geraint  into  the  castle  court, 

His  charger  trampling  many  a  prickly  star 
Of  sprouted  thistle  on  the  broken  stones. 

He  look’d  and  saw  that  all  was  ruinous. 

Here  stood  a  shatter’d  archway  plumed  with  fern  ; 

And  here  had  fallen  a  great  part  of  a  tower, 

Whole,  like  a  crag  that  tumbles  from  the  cliff, 

And  like  a  crag  was  gay  with  wilding  flowers ; 

And  high  above  a  piece  of  turret  stair, 

Worn  by  the  feet  that  now  were  silent,  wound 
Bare  to  the  sun,  and  monstrous  ivy-stems 
Claspt  the  gray  walls  with  hairy-fibred  arms, 

And  suck’d  the  joining  of  the  stones,  and  look’d 
A  knot,  beneath,  of  snakes,  aloft,  a  grove. 

Whatever  scene  may  have  prompted  this  description  as 
a  whole,  we  know  that  the  concluding  lines  were  suggested 
by  the  sight  of  the  ivy-covered  ruins  of  Tintern  Abbey.  In 
various  ways  this  spot  was  of  especial  significance  to  Tennyson. 
In  the  first  place  it  formed  the  background  of  one  of  Words¬ 
worth’s  greatest  poems,  for  which,  in  spite  of  the  fault  that 
he  found  with  its  over-lengthy  opening,  Tennyson  had  a  pro¬ 
found  admiration.  Again,  Tintern  had  a  personal  claim  upon 
him.  Not  far  away,  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  Bristol 
Channel,  was  Clevedon,  in  whose  lonely  church  on  the  hill 
overlooking  the  broad,  flowing  waters  where  the  Severn  joins 
the  sea,  lay  the  remains  of  Arthur  Hallam.  Inevitably,  when 
the  poet  visited  Tintern,  his  mind  wandered  to  the  friend 
whose  body  had  been  conveyed  from  Vienna  to  its  final 
resting-place  by  this  western  shore,  and  he  composed  the 
beautiful  lines  which  afterwards  appeared  in  the  nineteenth 
canto  of  In  Memoriam : 

The  Danube  to  the  Severn  gave 

The  darken’d  heart  that  beat  no  more ; 

They  laid  him  by  the  pleasant  shore, 

And  in  the  hearing  of  the  wave. 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


75 


There  twice  a  day  the  Severn  fills  ; 

The  salt  sea- water  passes  by, 

And  hushes  half  the  babbling  Wye, 

And  makes  a  silence  in  the  hills. 

The  Wye  is  hush’d  nor  moved  along, 

And  hush’d  my  deepest  grief  of  all, 

When  fill’d  with  tears  that  cannot  fall, 

I  brim  with  sorrow  drowning  song. 

The  tide  flows  down,  the  wave  again 
Is  vocal  in  its  wooded  walls  ; 

My  deeper  anguish  also  falls, 

And  I  can  speak  a  little  then. 

Another  of  Tennyson’s  poems  inspired  by  Tintern  Abbey 
was  Tears,  idle  tears.  At  the  sight  of  the  magnificent  ruins 
and  of  the  golden  cornfields  stretching  around  him,  he 
was  seized  with  a  feeling  of  regret  -for  the  passing  of  all 
that  is  fair  to  look  upon.  Possibly  the  memory  of  Hallam 
subconsciously  lent  an  added  poignancy  to  this  mood  of 
tender  longing.  However,  Tennyson  informed  Locker- 
Lampson  that  what  moved  him  to  write  the  poem  was  not 
real  woe,  but  rather  the  yearning  that  young  people  occa¬ 
sionally  experience  for  that  which  seems  to  have  departed 
for  ever.  This  feeling,  which  was  especially  strong  in  Tenny¬ 
son  as  a  youth,  finds  expression  in  the  lines  : 

Tears,  idle  tears,  I  know  not  what  they  mean, 

Tears  from  the  depth  of  some  divine  despair 
Eise  in  the  heart,  and  gather  to  the  eyes, 

In  looking  on  the  happy  autumn-fields 
And  thinking  of  the  days  that  are  no  more. 

Tennyson’s  visit  to  the  Welsh  coast  in  1839  gave  rise  to 
a  beautiful  simile  in  The  Princess.  It  occurs  in  the  second 
part,  in  the  description  of  Lady  Blanche’s  daughter,  the 
lovely  Melissa,  who  has  come  with  a  message  from  her 
mother.  She  stands  hesitating  upon  the  threshold  : 

with  her  lips  apart, 

And  all  her  thoughts  as  fair  within  her  eyes, 

As  bottom  agates  seen  to  wave  and  float 
In  crystal  currents  of  clear  morning  seas. 


76 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


In  reply  to  some  wiseacres  who  would  have  it  that  the 
simile  was  taken  partly  from  Beaumont  and  Fletcher,  partly 
from  Shakespeare,  Tennyson  stated  that  it  was  founded  on 
his  own  observations  while  bathing  in  Wales. 

The  place  which  suggested  this  passage  might  have  been 
either  Barmouth  or  Aberystwyth.  There  can  be  no  such 
doubt  concerning  the  scene  which  inspired  Canto  86  of  In 
Memoriam.  It  was  Barmouth,  and  presumably  on  the  occa¬ 
sion  of  the  poet’s  first  tour  in  1839.  On  a  beautiful  evening 
he  stands  and  gazes  out  to  sea.  Between  two  promontories 
the  tide  flows  calmly  along,  a  west  wind  gently  wafts  the 
rich  fragrance  of  summer  flowers  after  rain,  the  solemn  shades 
of  evening  descend,  and  far  away,  bathed  in  the  mysterious 
light  of  the  setting  sun,  gleams  the  rising  star.  To  the  heart 
of  the  poet,  lacerated  by  memories  of  his  lost  friend,  comes 
a  feeling  of  harmony  long  unknown : 

Sweet  after  showers,  ambrosial  air, 

That  rollest  from  the  gorgeous  gloom 
Of  evening  over  brake  and  bloom 
And  meadow,  slowly  breathing  bare 

The  round  of  space,  and  rapt  below 
Thro’  all  the  dewy-tassell'd  wood, 

And  shadowing  down  the  horned  flood 
In  ripples,  fan  my  brows  and  blow 

The  fever  from  my  cheek,  and  sigh 

The  full  new  life  that  feeds  thy  breath 
Throughout  my  frame,  till  Doubt  and  Death, 

Ill  brethren,  let  the  fancy  fly 

From  belt  to  belt  of  crimson  seas 

On  leagues  of  odour  streaming  far, 

To  where  in  yonder  orient  star 
A  hundred  spirits  whisper  ‘  Peace  ’. 

This  evening  at  Barmouth  was  evidently  a  supreme  and 
unforgettable  spiritual  experience.  At  Llanberis  Tennyson 
had  no  moments  of  such  intense  and  sublime  ecstasy,  but  in 
his  poems  there  are  several  reminiscences  of  his  stay  there. 
Edwin  Morris  was  written  at  Llanberis,  which  Tennyson  has 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  77 

taken  as  the  setting  of  the  poem.  He  speaks  of  the  bracken 
rusted  on  the  crags  and  of  a  ruined  castle,  presumably  the 
old  stronghold  of  Dolbadarn  : 

built 

When  men  knew  how  to  build,  upon  a  rock 
With  turrets  lichen-gilded  like  a  rock. 

At  the  end  of  the  poem  the  lover,  fondly  recalling  his  blissful 
rambles  by  the  lake,  says  : 

In  the  dust  and  drouth  of  London  life 
She  moves  among  my  visions  of  the  lake, 

While  the  prime  swallow  dips  his  wing,  or  then 

A  bile  the  gold-lily  blows,  and  overhead 

The  light  cloud  smoulders  on  the  summer  crag. 

It  would,  of  course,  be  foolish  to  apply  these  lines  literally 
to  the  poet  himself,  but  it  is  perhaps  permissible  to  read  in 
them  something  of  the  delight  which  we  know  Tennyson  to 
have  felt  in  this  mountain  retreat.  Though  Edwin  Morris  is 
but  one  of  Tennyson’s  minor  poems,  the  last  line  is  striking 
in  its  beauty  and  fitness. 

Llanberis  is  also  the  scene  of  The  Golden  Year,  another 
of  the  early  poems.  The  poet  tells  how  he  and  1  old  James’ 
had  been  up  Snowdon  and  on  their  descent  found  Leonard  at 
Llanberis.  With  him  they  crossed  between  Llyn  Padarn  and 
Llyn  Peris  and  climbed  the  hill  on  the  opposite  side.  The 
poem  ends  with  a  description  of  the  blasting  in  the  hills, 
whose  mighty  echoes  come  as  an  effective  contrast  to  the 
heated  arguments  which  these  puny  mortals  have  just  been 
putting  forth  : 

He  spoke  ;  and,  high  above,  I  heard  them  blast 
The  steep  slate-quarry,  and  the  great  echo  flap 
And  buffet  round  the  hills,  from  bluff  to  bluff. 

Yet  another  reminiscence  of  Llanberis  appears  in  The 
Sisters.  Tennyson  revives  the  memory  of  the  summer  night 
when  first  he  saw  it  by  the  gleam  of  lightning  piercing  the 
darkness,  and  draws  from  it  support  for  the  view  that  love 
at  first  sight  for  a  face  seen  but  a  moment  and  then  gone 
though  strange,  is  possible.  Once,  he  says : 


78 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


when  first 

I  came  on  lake  Llanberris  in  the  dark, 

A  moonless  night  with  storm — one  lightning-fork 
Flash’d  out  the  lake ;  and  tho’  I  loiter’d  there 
The  full  day  after,  yet  in  retrospect 
That  less  than  momentary  thunder-sketch 
Of  lake  and  mountain  conquers  all  the  day. 

The  mention  of  Llanberis  inevitably  brings  Snowdon  to  the 
mind,  and  Snowdon  also  figures  in  Tennyson’s  poetry.  In  the 
seventh  part  of  The  Princess  the  Lady  Ida  is  shown  mourn¬ 
ing  over  the  collapse  of  her  ideals.  She  climbs  to  the  roof 
and  looking  down  sees  her  woman’s  sanctuary  overrun  by 
men.  To  emphasize  her  helplessness  Tennyson  introduces  as 
a  simile  the  sudden  storm  which  he  once  witnessed  from  the 
top  of  Snowdon  as  he  gazed  over  the  neighbouring  mountains 
to  the  coast  and  the  sea  beyond.  Ida  is 

As  one  that  climbs  a  peak  to  gaze 
O'er  land  and  main,  and  sees  a  great  black  cloud 
Drag  inward  from  the  deeps,  a  wall  of  night, 

Blot  out  the  slope  of  sea  from  verge  to  shore, 

And  suck  the  blinding  splendour  from  the  sand, 

And  quenching  lake  by  lake  and  tarn  by  tarn 
Expunge  the  world. 

Though  no  locality  is  this  time  specified,  the  hills  of  Wales 
again  rise  before  Tennyson’s  eye  in  Sir  John  Oldcastle.  He 
pictures  the  zealous  reformer,  who  at  the  beginning  of  the 
fifteenth  century  has  fled  from  the  Tower  and  sought  a 
refuge  among  the  Welsh  mountains.  Oldcastle  wanders  about, 
enduring  great  hardships  patiently  and  cheerfully,  uplifted 
by  his  faith  in  God  and  his  hope  in  the  future : 

God  is  with  me  in  this  wilderness, 

These  wet  black  passes  and  foam-churning  chasms — 

And  God’s  free  air,  and  hope  of  better  things. 

Oldcastle  wishes  that  he  could  speak  the  tongue  of  those 
among  whom  he  now  wanders  in  exile,  not  for  the  purpose 
of  winning  them  to  the  true  faith,  though  he  contemplates 
doing  so  at  some  future  season,  but  to  satisfy  his  gnawing 
hunger.  As  it  is,  no  sooner  is  his  English  accent  heard  than 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


79 


memories  of  bloody  feuds  not  yet  appeased  prompt  a  sullen 
refusal  of  his  request  for  bread  : 

I  would  I  knew  their  speech  ;  not  now  to  glean, 

Not  now — I  hope  to  do  it — some  scatter’d  ears, 

Some  ears  for  Christ  in  this  wild  field  of  Wales — 

But,  bread,  merely  for  bread.  This  tongue  that  wagg’d 
They  said  with  such  heretical  arrogance 
Against  the  proud  archbishop  Arundel — 

So  much  God’s  cause  was  fluent  in  it — is  here 
But  as  a  Latin  Bible  to  the  crowd  ; 

‘  Bara  !  ’ 1 — what  use  ?  The  shepherd,  when  I  speak, 

Vailing  a  sudden  eyelid  with  his  hard 

‘Dim  Saesneg’2  passes,  wroth  at  things  of  old — 

No  fault  of  mine.  Had  he  God’s  word  in  Welsh 
He  might  be  kindlier  ;  happily  come  the  day ! 

As  may  be  seen  from  this  poem,  Tennyson  possessed  some 
knowledge  of  the  Welsh  tongue  and  in  Geraint  and  Enid  his 
ti'ansformation  of  the  brutal  earl’s  name  from  its  Welsh  form 
to  the  English  Doorm  proves  his  familiarity  with  Welsh  pro¬ 
nunciation.  The  Marriage  of  Geraint  and  Geraint  and  Enid, 
originally  published  as  one  poem  under  the  name  of  Enid, 
were  practically  completed  during  Tennyson’s  tour  of  1856. 
It  is  but  natural  therefore  that  these  poems  should  be  un¬ 
usually  rich  in  allusions  to  Welsh  scenes.  In  The  Marriage 
of  Geraint  the  hero  is  so  inspired  by  his  love  for  Enid  that, 
when  he  challenges  the  Knight  of  the  Sparrow-Hawk,  he  feels 
as  if  he  could  move  Cader  Idris.  And  when  he  has  won  Enid 
he  brings  her  to  Arthur’s  capital  where  the  Queen  awaits 
them  with  impatience. 

Now  thrice  that  morning  Guinevere  had  climb’d 
The  giant  tower,  from  whose  high  crest,  they  say, 

Men  saw  the  goodly  hills  of  Somerset, 

And  white  sails  flying  on  the  yellow  sea  ; 

But  not  to  goodly  hill  or  yellow  sea 
Look’d  the  fair  Queen,  but  up  the  vale  of  Usk, 

By  the  flat  meadow,  till  she  saw  them  come. 

In  Geraint  and  Enid  the  Usk  is  again  mentioned,  when  Enid 
warns  Geraint  of  three  villains  lying  in  ambush. 

1  Bread.  2  No  English. 


80 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


In  scarce  longer  time 
Than  at  Caeideon  the  full-tided  Usk, 

Before  he  turn  to  fall  seaward  again, 

Pauses,  did  Enid,  keeping  watch,  behold 

Three  other  horsemen. 

Recollections  of  North  Wales  also  emerge  in  Geraint  and 
Enid.  Once,  as  Tennyson  stood  near  Festiniog  listening  to 
the  brawling  of  a  mountain-torrent,  he  heard  the  louder  roar 
of  a  large  waterfall  and  he  uses  this  experience  as  a  simile  to 
convey  the  effect  of  Geraint’s  massive  voice  heard  above  the 
din  of  battle. 

As  one, 

That  listens  near  a  torrent  mountain-brook, 

All  thro’  the  crash  of  the  near  cataract  hears 
The  drumming  thunder  of  the  huger  fall 
At  distance,  were  the  soldiers  wont  to  hear 
His  voice  in  battle. 

At  the  close  of  the  poem  occurs  yet  another  simile,  which 
embodies  a  personal  observation  of  Tennyson.  Geraint,  now 
reconciled  to  Enid,  lies  recovering  of  his  grievous  wound,  and 
her  gentle  presence 

Fill’d  all  the  genial  courses  of  his  blood 
With  deeper  and  with  ever  deeper  love, 

As  the  south-west  that  blowing  Bala  lake 
Fills  all  the  sacred  Dee. 


2.  His  Knoiuledge  of  Welsh  Literature  and  Tradition 

These  reminiscences  of  Tennyson’s  Welsh  tours  are  by  no 
means  the  only  link  which  connects  him  with  Wales.  He 
knew  something  of  Welsh  history,  literature,  and  tradition. 
As  his  son  records  in  the  Memoir,  before  1840  Tennyson 
could  not  decide  whether  to  cast  the  Arthurian  legends  into 
the  form  of  an  epic  or  into  that  of  a  musical  masque,  but 
having  settled  on  the  epic  form  he  abandoned  himself  to 
serious  study  of  his  theme.  ‘  He  thought,  read,  and  talked 
about  King  Arthur.’  Keeping  his  goal  in  view,  Tennyson 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


81 


set  himself,  during  his  stay  in  Wales  in  1856,  to  acquire  some 
knowledge  of  Welsh  with  the  help  of  local  schoolmasters,  and 
he  and  his  wife  read  together  the  Hanes  Cymru  of  Thomas 
Price,  the  poems  of  Llywarch  Hen,  and  the  Mabinogion. 

One  of  the  best  known  tales  in  the  Mabinogion  is  that  of 
‘  Math  the  Son  of  Mathonwy in  the  course  of  which  it  is 
narrated  how  Math  and  Gwydion  by  magic  wrought  a  maiden 
from  the  blossoms  of  the  oak,  the  broom,  and  the  meadow¬ 
sweet.  She  was  the  fairest  and  most  graceful  being  that 
man  ever  saw  and  they  named  her  Blodeuwedd.  In  The 
Marriage  of  Geraint  the  mother  of  Enid,  arraying  her  in 
a  rich  silken  robe,  compares  her  to  this  maiden  of  wondrous 
beauty.  However,  the  only  tale  in  the  Mabinogion  which 
Tennyson  treated  fully  was  that  of  ‘  Geraint  the  Son  of 
Erbin 

A  comparison  of  Tennyson’s  version  writh  the  original  is 
illuminating  in  various  ways.  One  notices  immediately 
a  number  of  changes  in  the  narrative,  the  object  of  which 
was  to  secure  greater  unity.  In  the  tale,  Limours  figures 
only  in  the  second  part,  after  the  marriage  of  Geraint  and 
Enid.  Tennyson  makes  him  a  suitor,  who  had  pestered  Enid 
with  his  attentions  long  before  she  had  met  Geraint.  Simi¬ 
larly,  Edyrn,  instead  of  vanishing  early  on,  as  in  the  tale,  is 
reintroduced  at  the  close.  In  order  to  weld  together  both 
parts  of  his  story,  Tennyson  also  makes  the  dress  of  Enid  an 
important  feature,  so  much  so  that  at  times,  especially 
towards  the  end  of  The  Marriage  of  Geraint,  the  space  given 
to  it  seems  disproportionate.  The  Queen  is  made  to  say  that, 
even  if  Geraint’s  bride  were  a  beggar,  she  would  clothe  her 
like  the  sun  ;  hence  Geraint  brings  Enid  to  court  in  her  faded 
silk,  and  this  it  is  which  holds  a  higher  place  in  her  affection 
than  the  gorgeous  robe  that  Doorm  the  tempter  offers  her. 
Tennyson  is  equally  careful  to  relate  his  story  to  the  central 
theme  of  the  Idylls  of  the  King,  which  gives  it  a  purpose  all 
its  own.  On  the  morning  of  the  hunt  Guinevere  is  pictured 
as  lying  in  bed  lost  in  sweet  dreams  of  Lancelot,  and  it  is  the 
fear  lest  her  example  should  taint  Enid  which  makes  Geraint 
withdraw  his  wife  from  the  court.  At  the  close  Tennyson 

F 


2339-14 


82 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 

brings  before  us  the  ideal  king,  and  it  is  while  fighting  for 
Arthur  that  Geraint  perishes. 

The  firm  constructive  hand  of  Tennyson  is  again  seen  in 
the  omission  of  mafty  details  in  the  medieval  tale  which 
appeared  to  him  discursive  and  irrelevant.  He  never  forgot 
that  he  wished  to  concentrate  on  Geraint  and  Enid,  and  that 
everything  else  must  be  subordinated  to  the  narrative  of  their 
relations.  The  tale  opens  by  saying  that  Arthur  had  held 
court  at  Caerleon  for  seven  Easters  and  five  Christmases,  but 
that  on  this  occasion  it  was  Whitsuntide.  Then  it  explains 
that  Caerleon  was  chosen  because  it  was  so  easy  of  access  by 
sea  and  land.  Tennyson  briefly  mentions  that  Arthur  held 
court  at  Caerleon  at  Whitsuntide.  Next  the  tale  speaks  of 
the  nine  tributary  kings,  the  earls  and  barons  who  were 
Arthur’s  guests,  of  the  thirteen  churches  set  apart  for  mass 
and  of  how  they  were  allotted — one  for  Ai’thur  and  his 
guests,  one  for  the  Queen  and  her  ladies,  one  for  the  Steward 
of  the  Household  and  the  suitors,  a  fourth  for  the  Franks 
and  other  officers,  and  the  remaining  nine  for  the  Masters  of 
the  Household,  of  whom  the  most  famous  was  Gwalchmai 
because  of  his  noble  birth  and  prowess  in  war.  We  then 
hear  who  was  Arthur’s  chief  porter,  how  he  carried  out  his 
office  and  how  he  had  seven  men  under  him  whose  task  it 
was,  except  at  one  of  the  high  festivals,  to  guard  Arthur. 
Thereupon  follow  their  names,  lineage,  and  personal  peculiari¬ 
ties,  while  in  the  meantime  the  story  is  delayed.  Tennyson 
expedites  it  by  leaving  out  all  these  particulars. 

Characteristic  of  the  old  Welsh  narrator  is  not  only  his 
love  of  genealogy  but  also  his  passion  for  festivities,  and  so 
he  proceeds  to  relate  how  Arthur  and  his  court  spent  the 
night  before  the  hunt  in  song  and  entertainments.  He  then 
tells  how  they  went  to  bed,  how  Arthur  on  awaking  called 
his  four  attendants,  whose  names  and  lineage  are  of  course 
given,  and  how  they  arrayed  Arthur.  We  learn  further  that 
the  King  noticed  Guinevere  so  fast  asleep  that  she  did  not 
move  in  her  bed,  and  that  he  told  the  attendants  not  to  awake 
her ;  then  that  he  heard  the  horns  sounding,  one  from  near 
the  lodging  of  the  chief  huntsman  and  the  other  from  near 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  88 

that  of  the  chief  page.  All  this  Tennyson  dismisses  in  two 
lines  : 

So  with  the  morning  all  the  court  were  gone. 

But  Guinevere  lay  late  into  the  morn. 

The  contrast  between  the  poem  and  the  tale  may  again  be 
illustrated  from  the  scene  where  Geraint  and  Enid  are  enter¬ 
tained  at  court.  The  tale  mentions  the  minstrelsy,  the  ample 
supply  of  liquor,  the  multitude  of  games,  and  the  bountiful 
gifts  bestowed  upon  Enid,  including  the  stag’s  head  which 
increased  her  fame  and  added  to  the  number  of  her  friends. 
To  Tennyson  all  this  was  as  nothing,  and  he  merely  says  of 
Enid  that  the  Queen 

clothed  her  for  her  bridals  like  the  sun  ; 

And  all  that  week  was  old  Caerleon  gay. 

Another  portion  of  the  tale  which  Tennyson  modified  was 
that  concerning  the  departure  of  Geraint  and  Enid  from 
Arthur’s  court  after  their  marriage.  The  tale  describes  how 
ambassadors  came  from  Erbin  of  Cornwall,  who  asked  that 
his  son  should  be  allowed  to  return,  as  he  himself  was  grow¬ 
ing  old  and  his  neighbours  began  to  cast  covetous  eyes  on 
his  possessions,  so  that  Geraint  would  be  better  occupied  in 
defending  these  territories  than  in  winning  profitless  tourna¬ 
ments.  It  proceeds  to  relate  how  the  ambassadors  refreshed 
themselves  alter  their  journey  and  how  Arthur  upon  reflec¬ 
tion  found  it  but  right  that  Geraint  should  go.  We  hear 
likewise  of  the  conversation  between  Gei'aint  and  Arthur  and 
the  Queen ;  of  those  who  accompanied  Geraint ;  of  the  dis¬ 
cussions  about  the  desirability  of  Edyrn  forming  one  of  their 
number;  of  the  company  awaiting  Geraint  on  the  other  side 
of  the  Severn ;  of  the  welcome  given  to  him  in  his  own  land ; 
of  the  rejoicing  at  Erbin’s  court,  the  minstrelsy,  games,  and 
feasting ;  of  how  Erbin  handed  over  the  power  to  Geraint  in 
spite  of  his  reluctance ;  of  how  the  vassals  pledged  them¬ 
selves  to  Geraint ;  of  the  gifts  which  were  exchanged,  and  of 
Geraint’s  progress  through  Cornwall  to  receive  homage ;  and 
finally  of  how  he  escorted  the  nobles,  who  had  come  with  him 
from  Arthur’s  court,  on  their  homeward  journey  and  after- 


84  TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


wards  inspected  even  the  uttermost  pai'ts  of  his  dominions. 
In  Tennyson,  on  the  other  hand,  nothing  is  said  of  the  aged 
Erbin’s  pathetic  appeal ;  the  reason  for  Geraint  s  departure 
is  that  he  fears  the  effect  upon  Enid  of  the  Queen  s  example 
and  hence  gives  as  a  pretext  to  the  King  the  fact  that  his 
princedom,  bordering  on  lands  infested  with  bandits,  needs 
his  protecting  arm.  All  the  other  details  are  compressed 
into  four  lines : 


And  the  King 
Mused  for  a  little  on  his  plea,  but,  last, 
Allowing  it,  the  prince  and  Enid  rode, 

And  fifty  knights  rode  with  them,  to  the  shores 
Of  Severn,  and  they  past  to  their  own  land. 


Previously  there  is  in  the  tale  an  awkward  passage  which 
Tennyson  was  too  much  of  an  artist  to  leave  unaltered. 
After  the  encounter  with  the  Knight  of  the  Sparrow-Hawk 
the  story  of  Geraint  and  Enid  is  dropped  for  some  time,  and 
the  tale  reverts  to  Arthur’s  hunting  ol  the  stag,  and  intro¬ 
duces  an  argument  as  to  who  shall  be  presented  with  its 
head.  This  being  settled,  it  goes  on  to  describe  in  detail  the 
sorry  appearance  of  Edyrn  when  he  came  to  Arthur  s  court, 
the  conversation  with  the  King  and  Queen,  the  treatment 
accorded  to  Edyrn  and  his  lady,  and  the  healing  of  his 
wounds  by  Morgan  Tud,  the  royal  physician.  Only  after 
this  lengthy  digression  is  the  story  of  Geraint  and  Enid 
resumed,  Tenayson  avoids  this  jerky  conduct  of  the  narra¬ 
tive.  He  ignores  the  hunt  and  dismisses  Edyrn  briefly, 
returning  to  him  at  the  close  of  the  poem,  when  the  lovers 
tale  is  ended, 

Tennyson  saw  clearly  that  many  points  which  a  medieval 
writer  would  be  disposed  to  comment  on  were  not  merely  un¬ 
essential  to  the  main  theme  but  even  a  hindrance  to  it. 
What  more  natural,  when  Geraint  sets  out  with  Enid,  than 
that  the  tale  should  explain  what  steps  were  taken  to  carry 
on  the  administration  in  his  absence  ?  But  Tennyson  passes 
over  it  in  silence.  Again,  the  medieval  reader  would  delight 
in  the  description  of  the  horses  of  the  dwarf,  the  knight  and 
the  lady,  and  of  the  armour  or  raiment  they  wore.  Here 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


85 


also  Tennyson  says  nothing.  Not  less  significant  is  his 
treatment  of  the  combats  in  which  the  tale  abounds.  The  old 
writer  revelled  in  fighting,  so  much  so  that  the  frequent 
triumphs  of  the  hero  become  extravagant,  and  we  find  our¬ 
selves  no  longer  in  the  world  of  reality  but  in  the  realm  of 
marvels.  Tennyson  begins  the  encounter  of  Geraint  with  the 
Knight  of  the  Sparrow-Hawk  by  shortening  the  account 
of  the  tournament  ;  it  is  not  allowed  to  obscure  the  central 
motive.  In  the  description  of  Geraint’s  quest  the  tale  makes 
him  defeat  three  different  bands  of  robbers.  Their  numbers, 
whether  three,  four,  or  five,  are  immaterial.  Like  so  many 
puppets  they  come  forward  and  are  mechanically  dispatched 
by  Geraint.  Tennyson  omits  one  of  these  combats,  reduces 
the  number  of  assailants  in  the  others,  and  by  the  manner  of 
his  description  renders  his  stoxy  more  convincing.  In  the  first 
combat  Geraint  kills  his  first  enemy  with  his  lance,  and  then, 
darting  out  his  sword  to  right  and  left,  puts  the  others  out  of 
action  ;  in  the  second  the  leader  is  pictured  as  one  of  enormous 
stature,  and  as  soon  as  he  is  overthrown  his  companions  flee 
in  panic.1  In  the  tale  the  combat  which  follows  the  flight  of 
Geraint  and  Enid  from  the  town  is  ludicrous.  Eighty  knights 
in  succession  attack  Geraint  and  with  mechanical  precision 
each  is  overcome  with  one  blow.  The  Earl  comes  next  and 
holds  out  a  little  longer,  but  only  to  be  defeated  in  his  turn. 
Tennyson  is  infinitely  more  vivid,  dramatic,  and  credible 
when  he  tells  how 

Wild  Limours, 

Borne  on  a  black  horse,  like  a  thunder-cloud 
Whose  skirts  are  loosen'd  by  the  breaking  storm, 

Half  ridden  oft’  with  by  the  thing  he  rode. 

And  all  in  passion  uttering  a  dry  shriek. 

Dash’d  on  Geraint. 

Limours  is  overthrown,  then  the  man  behind  him,  whereupon 
the  rest,  seized  with  terror  at  the  approach  of  Geraint,  turn 
their  horses  in  flight. 

The  poem  omits  altogether  several  encounters,  such  as  that 

’  Variety  is  also  obtained  by  the  changing  attitude  of  Enid  who  in  the 
first  combat  looks  on,  hut  in  the  second  anxiously  stands  aside  with 


86  TENNYSON  AND  WALES 

with  Gwiffert  Petit,  who  will  let  no  one  pass  his  tower  with¬ 
out  a  duel,  those  with  Kai  and  Gwalchmai,  when  Geraint 
refuses  to  accompany  them  to  Arthur,  and  that  with  the 
giants.  Tennyson  would  have  nothing  to  do  with  adventure 
for  its  own  sake,  and  he  felt  that  all  these  struggles  by  their 
very  number  became  incredible  and  also  impeded  the  march 
of  the  main  story.  Although  his  hero’s  qualities  are  heightened, 
Tennyson  did  not  wish  him  to  be  a  mere  fairy-tale  figure. 
For  this  reason,  and  also  because  the  tale  of  the  reconciliation 
of  Geraint  and  Enid  was  complete,  he  omitted  as  superfluous 
the  adventure  of  the  magic  mist. 

In  harmony  with  Tennyson’s  desire  to  avoid  mere  marvels 
is  his  treatment  of  character.  With  him  characterization 
and  the  analysis  of  motive  take  a  prominent  place ;  in  the 
tale  they  are  fragmentary  or  non-existent.  In  no  respect  are 
the  medieval  tale  and  the  nineteenth-century  poem  more 
unlike  than  in  the  love  of  incident  on  the  one  hand  and  the 
interest  in  psychology  on  the  other.  Characters  such  as  the 
dwarf  and  Edyrn  his  master,  Limours,  Doorm,  Enid’s  mother 
and  Yniol  assume  much  clearer  shape  under  Tennyson’s 
hand.  In  the  tale  no  explanation  is  given  of  the  dwarf’s 
churlish  conduct  to  the  Queen’s  attendant.  Tennyson  pictures 
him  as  old,  vicious,  irritable,  and  proud  like  his  haughty 
master,  so  that  at  once  we  understand  his  action.  At  a  later 
stage,  when  Edyrn  has  ‘  weeded  his  heart  ’  and  is  about  to  be 
admitted  to  the  Round  Table,  he  is  made  to  recount  to  Enid 
the  causes  of  his  former  arrogance. 

To  the  character  of  Limours  Tennyson  devotes  far  more 
attention  than  the  corresponding  figure  receives  in  the  tale. 
In  the  latter  he  is  shown  in  a  more  favourable  light.  Thus, 
when  he  is  informed  of  the  arrival  of  Geraint  and  Enid  in  his 
town,  he  gives  instructions  that  they  shall  be  honourably 
used,  sends  a  youth  to  wait  upon  them,  and  himself  pays 
a  visit  of  courtesy.  He  has  no  evil  intent,  and  it  is  only  on 
seeing  the  beauty  of  Enid  that  he  tries  to  induce  her  under 
threats  of  violence  to  abandon  Geraint.  Tennyson,  who  intro- 

averted  gaze,  just  as  she  warns  Geraint  sometimes  by  speech,  sometimes 
by  pointing  silently  to  the  dust  raised  by  the  hoofs  of  his  foes. 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  87 

duces  Limours  as  a  suitor  for  Enid  in  the  earlier  portion  of 
the  story,  has  already  sketched  the  man  : 

A  creature  wholly  given  to  brawls  and  wine, 

Drunk  even  when  he  woo’d. 

We  are  therefore  prepared  for  Limours  when  he  and  his 
followers  burst  into  the  room  of  Geraint  and  Enid.  Effe¬ 
minate  in  appearance  and  pale  from  dissipation,  he  addresses 
Geraint  face  to  face  with  a  courtly  air,  but  amidst  this  dis¬ 
play  of  cordiality  watches  out  of  the  corner  of  his  eye  the 
sad  and  lonely  Enid.  Geraint  offers  refreshment  and  Limours, 
Hushed  with  wine,  tells  tales  of  double  meaning  and  his  wit 
having  made  Geraint  merry,  he  asks  leave  to  speak  to  her. 
He  then  declares  his  love  in  a  sentimental  vein.  She  is  the 
pilot  star  of  his  solitary  life,  his  early  and  his  only  love.  It 
is  the  loss  of  her  which  has  made  him  wild,  and  yet  he  is  not 
wholly  riotous.  He  insinuates  that  Geraint  has  wearied  of 
her;  she  need  but  say  the  word  and  he  shall  be  removed.  If 
she  will  not,  Limours  threatens  to  take  advantage  of  his 
superior  power,  but  the  next  moment  apologizes  for  his  mad¬ 
ness.  Then 

Low  at  leave-taking,  with  his  brandish’d  plume 
Brushing  his  instep,  bow’d  the  all-amorous  earl. 

Tennyson  has  no  wish  that  our  sympathy  should  be  won 
by  the  maudlin  self-pity  of  Limours.  He  shows  him  on  his 
way  home  with  1  wine-heated  eyes  ’,  babbling  to  his  followers 
of  Enid’s  love  for  him. 

Another  full-length  portrait  is  that  of  Earl  Doorm.  In  the 
tale  the  Earl  is  courteous  to  Enid  at  first  and  only  when  his 
desires  are  thwarted  does  he  use  force.  His  arguments,  when 
he  seeks  to  induce  her  to  forget  Geraint,  are  almost  kindly : 

‘  I  will  act  towards  thee  in  such  wise,  that  thou  needest  not 
be  sorrowful,  whether  yonder  knight  live  or  die.  Behold, 
a  good  Earldom,  together  with  myself,  will  I  bestow  on  thee  ; 
be  therefore  happy  and  joyful.’  It  is  not  until  Enid  has  irri¬ 
tated  him  by  her  stubborn  refusal  that  he  loses  his  temper 
and  boxes  her  ears.  In  Tennyson,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
wild,  licentious  character  of  the  Earl  is  suggested  from  the 


88 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 

beginning.  As  Enid  sat  by  the  wounded  Geraint  no  one 
heeded  her : 

A  woman  weeping  for  her  murder’d  mate 
Was  cared  as  much  for  as  a  summer  shower. 

One  took  him  for  a  victim  of  the  Earl  and  found  it  too 
perilous  to  stop  and  pity  him.  Then  came  one  of  Doorm’s 
men  half-whistling,  half-singing  a  coarse  song  and  drove  the 
dust  in  Enid’s  eyes.  Another  traveller,  a  fugitive 

flying  from  the  wrath  of  Doorm 
Before  an  ever-fancied  arrow,  made 
The  long  way  smoke  beneath  him  in  his  fear. 

We  are  thus  ready  for  the  entry  of  the  gigantic  Doorm. 
Tennyson  presents  him  to  us  : 

Broad-faced  with  under-fringe  of  russet  beard, 

Bound  on  a  foray,  rolling  eyes  of  prey. 

With  loud  voice,  like  one  hailing  a  ship,  he  rudely  accosts 
Enid.  If  Geraint  is  not  dead,  why  need  she  wail?  If  he  is, 
then  she  is  a  fool — wailing  will  not  bring  him  back  to  life, 
and  her  tears  mar  her  beauty.  He  speaks  as  one  to  whom 
the  higher  emotions  are  entirely  unknown  and  to  whom  death 
is  an  everyday  sight.  His  predatory  instinct  is  revealed  in 
his  command  to  look  after  Geraint’s  steed,  his  sensual  nature 
in  the  lustful  eye  which  he  at  once  casts  on  Enid.  But  he 
is  not  one  to  let  his  plans  be  altered  for  the  sake  of  a 
woman,  and  so,  unlike  the  knight  in  the  tale,  he  does  not 
chivalrously  escort  Enid  to  his  castle  but  proceeds  on  his 
foray.  Geraint  and  Enid  are  entrusted  to  two  brawny  spear¬ 
men,  as  brutal  and  callous  as  their  master.  Angered  at  the 
thought  of  losing  their  share  of  the  boot}^,  on  reaching  the 
castle  they  throw  down  in  haste  the  bier  on  which  the  wounded 
Geraint  is  lying  and  rush  out,  cursing  him  and  Enid,  their 
master,  and  their  own  souls. 

It  is  noteworthy  how  Tennyson  repeatedly  emphasizes  the 
nakedness  of  the  hall.  There  is  no  sign  of  refinement,  all  is 
hard  and  uncouth  like  the  Earl  himself.  The  scene  in  the 
hall  that  follows  the  return  of  Doorm  and  his  men  strengthens 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


89 


the  impression  already  received.  They  hurl  down  their  spears 
with  a  clatter ;  Doorm  hammers  on  the  table  with  the  haft 
of  his  knife,  while  hogs  and  quarters  of  beeves  are  brought 
in  and  the  hall  is  dim  with  steam.  No  word  is  spoken  as 
they  sit  down  and  eat  noisily,  ‘  feeding  like  horses  The 
gentle  Enid  shrinks  from  these  bestial  creatures,  but  Doorm, 
catching  sight  of  her,  urges  her  to  eat,  and  in  the  presence  of 
the  crowd  brazenly  declares  that  were  she  not  so  pale,  she 
might  share  his  earldom.  At  this  : 

The  brawny  spearman  let  his  cheek 
Bulge  with  the  unswallow’d  piece,  and  turning  stared, 

while  the  women  with  venomous  tongue  hiss  in  hate  and 
jealousy.  With  low  voice  and  drooping  head,  Enid  merely 
asks  to  be  left  alone.  Doorm,  satisfied  with  his  own  gracious¬ 
ness,  assumes  that  she  has  thanked  him  and  urges  her  to  eat 
and  be  glad.  When  she  asks  how  she  can  be  glad,  the  Earl 
in  his  fury  carries  her  by  main  force  to  the  table  and  thrusts 
the  dish  before  her.  This  emphasis  on  Doorm’s  brutality 
springs  from  Tennyson’s  conception  ;  the  prototj'pe  in  the 
tale  ‘  many  times  desired  her  to  eat  ’.  To  the  poet  we  owe 
also  the  vivid  picture  of  the  Earl  striding  up  and  down  the 
hall,  gnawing  now  his  upper,  now  his  lower  lip  or  his  russet 
beard.  It  is  characteristic  of  his  mentality  that  he  should 
think  to  win  Enid  by  the  gift  of  a  beautiful  robe.  How  can 
an  earthy  creature  like  this  understand  the  pathetic  appeal : 

Pray  you  be  gentle,  pray  you  let  me  be. 

I  never  loved,  can  never  love  but  him. 

Yea,  God,  I  pray  you  of  your  gentleness, 

He  being  as  he  is,  to  let  me  be. 

Fidelity  of  this  kind  is  beyond  Doorm’s  ken  and  he  answers 
with  the  argument  most  familiar  to  him — a  blow.  Such  is 
Doorm,  a  vivid  figure  who  seems  to  have  stepped  out  of  the 
reign  of  King  Stephen,  when  men  said  in  bitter  despair  that 
Christ  and  his  saints  slept,  and  this  figure  is  entirely  Tenny¬ 
son’s  creation.  The  very  antithesis  of  the  Tennysonian  ideal 
of  reverence,  wisdom,  temperance,  and  self-control,  Doorm  is 
unforgettable. 


90 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


The  characters  of  Enid’s  father  and  mother  are  not  drawn 
in  such  detail  and  yet  they  are  less  shadowy  than  in  the  tale. 
The  mother’s  affection  for  and  pride  in  her  daughter  and  her 
weakness  for  dress  are  shown.  Hence  her  silent  indignation 
when  Geraint  insists  on  taking  Enid  to  Arthur’s  court  in  a 
worn  and  faded  gown.  Even  in  adversity  she  cannot  forget 
that  she  comes  from 

a  goodly  house, 

With  store  of  rich  apparel,  sumptuous  fare, 

And  page,  and  maid,  and  squire,  and  seneschal, 

And  pastime  both  of  hawk  and  hound,  and  all 
That  appertains  to  noble  maintenance. 

Still  more  interesting  than  Tennyson’s  portrayal  of  the 
mother  is  his  analysis  of  the  father.  Just  as  he  underlines 
the  baseness  of  Limours  and  Doorm,  so  he  idealizes  Yniol. 
In  the  tale  Yniol  is  far  from  immaculate  and  indeed  richly 
deserves  the  misfortune  that  comes  upon  him.  His  crime  was 
that  he  seized  the  possessions  of  his  nephew,  with  the  result, 
as  Yniol  informs  Geraint,  that 1  when  he  came  to  his  strength, 
he  demanded  of  me  his  property,  but  I  withheld  it  from  him. 
So  he  made  war  upon  me,  and  wrested  from  me  all  that 
I  possessed.’  We  are  inclined  to  hold  with  the  nephew  and 
see  no  reason  why  the  gallant  and  chivalrous  Geraint  of 
Tennyson’s  conception  should  intervene  on  behalf  of  this 
Yniol.  Tennyson  perceived  the  difficulty  and  fearing  also 
that  an  unsympathetic  Yniol  might  weaken  the  attraction  of 
Enid,  he  completely  altered  the  motives.  The  fault  lies  in 
the  tempestuous  character  of  the  nephew,  knowing  which, 
Yniol  rejects  his  suit  for  the  hand  of  Enid.  In  revenge  the 
nephew  ousts  him  from  his  earldom  and  sacks  the  castle. 
This  is  all  the  more  easily  done,  because,  owing  to  his  lavish 
hospitality,  Yniol  is  reduced  in  means,  and  his  servants  are 
readily  won  over  by  large  bribes.  Our  sympathy  is  thus 
transferred  to  Yniol,  who  is  a  pleasing,  if  somewhat  weak 
personality.  He  lacks  will-power  and  is  so  gentle  that  he  lets 
men  have  their  way.  In  his  adversity  he  displays  a  similar 
passivity  and  meekly  endures  the  wrongs  inflicted  on  him, 
even  at  the  risk  of  incurring  contempt.  The  same  paternal 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


91 


care  as  led  him  to  thwart  his  nephew  is  manifest  when  Geraint 
requests  that  Enid  may  be  the  lady  whom  he  will  uphold  in 
the  tournament.  Yniol  wishes  that  his  wife  shall  first  consult 
Enid’s  inclination,  for 

a  maiden  is  a  tender  thing 

And  best  by  her  that  bore  her  understood. 

What  could  be  more  natural  and  desirable  than  that  an  Yniol 
such  as  this  should  receive  the  help  of  Geraint  ? 

It  is  above  all  upon  the  characters  of  Geraint  and  Enid 
and  their  interaction  that  Tennyson  has  bestowed  his  skill 
and  artistry.  Tennyson’s  Geraint  is  the  flower  of  chivalry,  and 
the  problem  which  the  poet  has  to  solve  is  how  to  account  for 
the  hero’s  unkindness  to  Enid  without  destroying  our  belief 
in  his  noble  qualities.  In  what  measure  and  by  what  means 
he  achieves  this  will  be  seen  later.  As  for  Enid,  she  is  a  very 
different  personage  from  her  counterpart  in  the  Mabinogion. 
The  latter  embodies  the  medieval  ideal  of  woman,  unques¬ 
tioning  obedience  to  husband  and  parents,  by  whom  she  is 
treated  accordingly.  Tennyson’s  Enid,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
no  insignificant  figure,  and  throughout  the  poem  appears  in 
the  foreground  more  often  than  in  the  tale.  We  have  an 
example  in  the  first  meeting  of  Geraint  and  Enid.  The 
medieval  narrator,  describing  Geraint’s  arrival  at  the  hall  of 
Yniol,  says  that  he  beheld  ‘  a  maiden,  upon  whom  were  a 
vest  and  a  veil,  that  were  old,  and  beginning  to  be  worn  out. 
And,  truly,  he  never  saw  a  maiden  more  full  of  comeliness, 
and  grace,  and  beauty  than  she.’  Conscious  that  this  is  one 
of  the  vital  situations  of  his  story,  Tennyson  gives  it  a 
greater  amplitude  and  richness.  As  Geraint  approaches,  he 
hears  Enid  singing,  and  the  description  that  ensues  transcends 
the  mundane  and  carries  us  away  to  the  world  of  romance. 
Love  as  instantaneous  and  imperishable  as  that  of  Tristan 
for  Isolt  has  come  to  Geraint : 

Here,  by  God’s  rood,  is  the  one  maid  for  me. 

Subsequently  in  the  tale  Enid  waits  upon  Geraint,  even 
disarrays  him,  and  gives  his  horse  provender,  all  which 
Geraint  seems  to  take  for  granted.  In  the  poem  Geraint’s 


92 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


chivalry  prompts  him  to  rise  and  help  Enid  in  her  task,  and 
only  reluctantly  does  he  acquiesce  when  Yniol  informs  him 
that  the  custom  of  the  house  will  not  permit  of  a  guest 
serving  himself.  Thus,  owing  to  Tennyson’s  skilful  presenta¬ 
tion,  in  spite  of  Geraint’s  remissness,  his  reputation  for 
courtesy  is  enhanced.  Immediately  after,  the  tale  relates 
that  Enid,  having  bought  provisions  in  the  town,  apologizes 
for  their  inadequacy,  and  that  Geraint  answers  curtly,  ‘  It  is 
good  enough’, an  incident  which  Tennyson  suppresses.  Equally 
characteristic  is  the  passage  in  the  tale  where  Gei’aint  asks 
leave  to  use  the  name  of  Enid  in  challenging  the  Knight  of 
the  Sparrow-Hawk.  Her  father  answers,  1  Gladly  will  I  per¬ 
mit  thee  ’.  An  echo  of  an  age  when  a  daughter’s  obedience 
was  a  matter  of  course.  But  Tennyson’s  Geraint  in  requesting 
this  favour  declares  his  admiration  for  Enid ;  it  is  not  merely 
that  for  the  purpose  of  the  tournament  he  needs  some  lady 
to  uphold.  And  Yniol ’s  answer  is  that  her  own  inclinations 
must  first  be  discovered.  After  the  tournament  Yniol  in  the 
tale  gives  Enid  away  as  he  would  one  of  his  serfs  or  his 
goods  and  chattels,  and  Geraint  is  as  curt  and  masterful  as 
he.  ‘  “  Chieftain,  behold  the  maiden  for  whom  thou  didst 
challenge  at  the  tournament,  I  bestow  her  upon  thee.”  “  She 
shall  go  with  me  ”,  said  Geraint,  “  to  the  Court  of  Arthur;  and 
Arthur  and  Gwenhwyvar  they  shall  dispose  of  her  as  they 
will.  Let  not  the  damsel  array  herself  except  in  her  vest  and 
veil,  until  she  come  to  the  Court  of  Arthur,  to  be  clad  by 
Gwenhwyvar  in  such  garments  as  she  may  choose.’’  ’  The 
corresponding  scene  in  Tennyson  forms  an  illuminating  con¬ 
trast.  Representing  as  it  does  another  great  crisis  in  Enid’s 
life,  it  is  dealt  with  fully,  and  her  emotions  are  set  forth  in 
detail.  The  question  of  her  attire  is  not  so  easy  of  solution 
as  in  the  tale  ;  we  are  no  longer  in  the  age  of  patient  Griselda. 
Geraint  says  to  her  father  : 

Earl,  entreat  her  by  my  love, 

Albeit  I  give  no  reason  but  my  wish, 

That  she  ride  with  me  in  her  faded  silk. 

Even  after  this  Geraint  feels  called  upon  to  make  elaborate 
apologies  and  explanations  to  Enid’s  mother.  This  prominence 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  93 

of  the  women,  the  kindly  consideration  of  Yniol  and  the 
deference  of  Geraint  are  altogether  foreign  to  the  tale.  Again 
we  seem  to  step  back  several  centuries  when,  in  the  tale,  after 
the  first  combat,  Geraint  once  more  enjoins  silence  upon  Enid. 
1  “  I  declare  unto  Heaven,”  said  he,  “  if  thou  doest  not  thus,  it 
will  be  to  thy  cost.”  “  I  will  do,  as  far  as  I  can,  Lord  ”,  said 
she,  “  according  to  thy  desire.”  ’  Of  these  threats  and  this 
slave-like  obedience  there  is  no  trace  in  Tennyson.  His  Enid 
observes  Geraint’s  commands,  it  is  true,  but  not  because  she 
is  cowed  by  a  bully. 

Not  only  has  Tennyson  modernized  the  relations  of  Geraint 
and  Enid,  he  has  made  their  actions  more  reasonable.  The 
development  of  their  love  is  traced  step  by  step  in  a  manner 
which  the  tale  does  not  even  attempt.  Geraint,  charmed  by 
the  singing  of  Enid,  is  completely  won  by  her  gentle  demeanour 
and  involuntarily  his  eyes  follow  her  as  she  moves  about  the 
hall.  As  for  Enid,  she  has  often  heard  from  her  father  of 
Geraint’s  exploits  : 

This  dear  child  hath  often  heard  me  praise 
Your  feats  of  arms,  and  often  when  I  paused 
Hath  ask’d  again,  and  ever  loved  to  hear. 

What  more  probable  than  that  Enid,  whose  only  suitors 
hitherto  had  been  the  drunken  Limours  and  the  arrogant 
Edyrn,  should  fall  in  love  with  the  paragon  of  chivalry, 
Geraint  ? 

Obviously  Geraint  and  Enid  move  in  a  different  atmosphere 
from  their  counterparts  in  the  tale.  They  are  idealized  figures 
of  romance  and  embody  the  Tennysonian  ethical  code.  The 
process  of  idealization  may  be  illustrated  from  the  incident  of 
the  dwarf.  In  the  original  Geraint  is  on  the  point  of  slaying 
the  dwarf,  but  refrains  because  his  vengeance  would  still 
remain  unsatisfied  and  also  because  the  knig-ht  would  irnme- 
diately  kill  him  in  his  defenceless  state.  All  ignoble  or  even 
practical  calculations  are  far  from  Tennyson’s  hero.  He 
controls  himself,  such  is 

his  exceeding  manfulness 
And  pure  nobility  of  temperament, 

Wroth  to  be  wroth  at  such  a  worm. 


94 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


It  is  the  lofty  nobility  of  Geraint’s  nature  which  causes  the 
misunderstanding  between  him  and  Enid.  He  is  always 
haunted  by  the  fear  that  her  intimacy  with  Guinevere,  an 
intimacy  which  he  himself  had  originally  desired  and  en¬ 
couraged,  will  contaminate  her,  and  Tennyson  gives  him 
confirmation  of  his  doubts  in  certain  words  uttered  by  Enid, 
which  he  overhears  and  misinterprets.  Enid  is  musing  and 
reproaches  herself  for  not  telling  Geraint  that  men  slander 
him  by  saying  that  he  has  become  effeminate  and  neglects 
his  duties  as  a  ruler.  ‘  0  me,  I  fear  that  I  am  no  true  wife  !  ’ 
she  says,  and  Geraint,  waking  at  this  moment,  snatches  at 
the  words.  Tennyson  therefore  makes  Geraint’s  conduct 
more  reasonable  and  in  some  measure  justifiable.  He  is, 
moreover,  careful  to  point  out  that  even  so,  Geraint  would 
not  believe  the  worst  of  Enid  : 

He  loved  and  reverenced  her  too  much 
To  dream  she  could  be  guilty  of  foul  act. 

How  significant  it  is  also  that  when  he  orders  Enid  to  follow 
him,  he  brings  no  open  accusation  against  her.  ‘  I  charge 
thee,  ask  not  ’,  a  delicacy  unknown  to  his  prototype,  who 
tells  Enid  that,  when  his  strength  is  gone,  she  can  seek  out 
him  of  whom  she  is  thinking. 

Thus  Tennyson’s  Geraint  sets  out  with  conflicting  emotions, 
and  the  poet  has  attempted  to  show  the  shifting  phases  of 
the  struggle  until  the  reconciliation  is  ultimately  reached, 
a  gradual  and  subtle  process  of  which  the  tale  gives  but  the 
slightest  indications.  He  tells  us  Geraint’s  motive  for  sending 
Enid  to  ride  ahead  : 

Perhaps  because  he  loved  her  passionately, 

And  felt  that  tempest  brooding  round  his  heart, 

Which,  if  he  spoke  at  all,  would  break  perforce 
Upon  a  head  so  dear  in  thunder. 

Even  in  this  crisis  Geraint’s  tenderness  checks  his  an^er. 
After  the  first  encounter  he  draws  a  little  nearer  to  her,  and 
regret  begins  to  moderate  his  rage.  With  mingled  feelings 
he  watches  her  trying  to  manage  the  steeds  of  the  dead 
knights.  He  would  like  to  give  vent  to  his  wrath  in  one 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  95 

wild  outburst,  but  cannot  bring  himself  to  charge  her  with 
the  least  immodesty,  and  so  it  smoulders  fiercely. 

Thus  tongue-tied,  it  made  him  wroth  the  more 
That  she  could  speak  whom  his  own  ear  had  heard 
Call  herself  false  :  and  suffering  thus  he  made 
Minutes  an  age. 

Just  before  the  second  combat  he  cannot  refrain  from  dropping 
a  hint  of  his  suspicion  :  ‘  If  I  fall,  cleave  to  the  better  man’, 
but  after  it  is  over  he  draws  still  closer  to  her.1  In  the 
episode  of  the  mowers’  dinner  his  latent  affection  is  revealed. 
Ihe  tale  makes  the  boy  offer  it  of  his  own  accord,  but  in 
Tennj^son  it  is  Geraint,  who,  observing  the  pallor  of  Enid  and 
feeling  distress  at  her  fainting  condition,  begs  the  youth  to 
let  her  eat.  His  first  thought  is  of  her  in  spite  of  his  own 
gnawing  hunger,  which  Tennyson  is  careful  to  emphasize. 

Meanwhile  we  have  not  been  left  in  ignorance  of  Enid’s 
emotions.  Stupefied  at  first,  and  wondering  what  her  fault 
can  be,  she  prays  for  Geraint’s  safety,  starting  at  the  whistle 
of  the  plover  and  trembling  at  the  thought  of  an  ambush. 
Though  she  respects  bis  wishes,  when  danger  threatens,  Avitli 
‘  timid  firmness  ’  she  disregards  them  and  speaks.  During  the 
combats  she  suffers  agonies  of  fear  on  Geraint’s  account.  In 
the  second  she  stands  aside,  not  daring  to  watch, 

only  breathe 

Short  fits  of  prayer,  at  every  stroke  a  breath. 

At  times  she  falls  into  reverie,  thinking  of  the  past  and  in 
spite  of  Geraint's  inexplicable  behaviour,  her  love  is  unabated. 
In  their  room  at  night  she  bends  tenderly  over  him,  listening 
to  his  low  and  equal  breathing  and  rejoicing  that  he  is  so  far 
unscathed.  Tennyson  stresses  her  devotion  by  his  description 
of  her  exhaustion  and  care-filled  sleep : 

1  In  the  tale  only  after  the  third  combat  with  robbers,  omitted  by 
Tennyson,  is  Geraint  made  to  feel  remorse.  ‘  It  grieved  him  as  much  as 
his  wrath  would  permit,  to  see  a  maiden  so  illustrious  as  she  having  so 
much  trouble  with  the  care  of  the  horses.’  Still  it  does  not  prevent  him 
from  making  her  sit  up  all  night  to  watch  the  horses  while  he  sleeps. 


96 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


OvertoilM 

By  that  clay’s  grief  and  travel,  evermore 
Seem’d  catching  at  a  rootless  thorn,  and  then 
Went  slipping  down  horrible  precipices, 

And  strongly  striking  out  her  limbs  awoke. 

Her  P'entle  manner  and  low,  harmonious  voice  recall  Cordelia 
in  the  concluding  scenes  of  King  Lear.  Ever  vigilant,  she 
glides  about  at  night  ‘  among  the  heavy  breathings  of  the 
house  ’  like  a  ‘  household  spirit 

When  the  journey  is  resumed,  though  Geraint  is  sullen  and 
suspicious,  he  does  not  repel  Enid  and  rides  much  nearer  to 
her  than  the  day  before.  A  new  hope  springs  up  in  her 
heart,  but  the  reconciliation  is  not  yet. 

Geraint 

Waving  an  angry  hand  as  who  should  say 
‘  Ye  watch  me’,  sadden’d  all  her  heart  again. 

And  after  the  defeat  of  Limours  he  cruelly  asks  if  they 
should  strip  her  lover  and  if  her  palfrey  would  have  the 
heart  to  bear  the  dead  man’s  armour.  Here  for  the  first 
time  Geraint  resembles  his  medieval  prototype. 

However,  the  climax  in  the  I’elations  of  Geraint  and  Enid 
is  fast  approaching.  When  Geraint  is  wounded  by  Limours 
and  suddenly  reels  from  his  saddle,  Enid  shows  her  strength 
of  mind.  Without  faltering  she  undoes  his  armour  and  binds 
up  his  wound,  and  only  then  does  she  burst  into  tears.  When 
they  are  taken  to  the  hall  of  Doorm,  Enid  sits  by  Geraint 
chafing  his  pale  hands,  calling  to  him,  her  warm  tears  falling 
on  his  face.  Slowly  he  revives,  but  feigns  death  to  test  her 
to  the  uttermost  and  enjoy  the  knowledge  that  it  is  for  him 
she  weeps.  It  was  perhaps  partly  for  the  sake  of  this  scene 
that  Tennyson,  altering  the  tale,  sent  Doorm  on  a  foray.  The 
fact  that  the  reader  knows  Geraint  to  be  awake  and  listening, 
when  Doorm  afterwards  bullies  Enid,  lends  to  the  poem 
a  dramatic  tension  lacking  in  the  tale.  After  the  sudden 
death  of  Doorm,  Geraint  makes  an  ample  apology  to  Enid. 
He  has  done  her  wrong,  but  henceforth  is  hers ;  as  a  penance 
he  will  not  ask  what  she  meant  by  saying  that  she  was  no 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  97 

true  wife,  but  will  die  rather  than  doubt.  And  so  the  chivalrous 
nature  which  Tennyson  set  out  to  depict,  after  being  obscured 
for  a  while,  shines  forth  once  more.  Enid  is  too  deeply 
moved  for  words,  but  her  feelings  are  described  at  the  supreme 
moment  of  reconciliation : 

And  never  yet,  since  high  in  Paradise 
O’er  the  four  rivers  the  first  roses  blew, 

Came  purer  pleasure  unto  mortal  kind 

Than  lived  thro’  her,  who  in  that  perilous  hour 

Put  hand  to  hand  beneath  her  husband’s  heart, 

And  felt  him  hers  again.  She  did  not  weep, 

But  o’er  her  meek  eyes  came  a  happy  mist 
Like  that  which  kept  the  heart  of  Eden  green 
Before  the  useful  trouble  of  the  rain. 

Just  as  Tennyson  is  far  more  concerned  with  the  psychology 
of  his  characters  than  is  the  tale,  so  he  bestows  more  pains 
upon  vivid  description.  The  sketches  of  the  town  and  the 
ruined  castle  in  The  Marriage  of  Geraint  owe  nothing  to  the 
tale.  At  every  turn,  whether  it  be  the  description  of  the  din 
made  by  the  armourers  or  of  some  combat,  one  observes 
picturesque  details  which  Tennyson  has  added  and  which 
invest  the  story  with  a  new  quality.  Thus  Geraint  and  Enid 

climb’d  upon  a  fair  and  even  ridge 
And  show’d  themselves  against  the  sky,  and  sank. 

Geraint  reaches  the  town,  ‘  down  the  long  street  riding 
wearily  ’,  and  afterwards  ‘  o’er  a  mount  of  newly- fallen  stones  ’ 
he  enters  ‘the  dusky-rafter’d  many-cobweb’d  hall  ’  of  Yniol. 
And  when  Geraint  and  Enid  set  forth  from  their  palace,  they 
pass  ‘  gray  swamps  and  pools,  waste  places  of  the  hern  ’.  A 
few  passages  from  the  tale  and  the  poem,  if  we  put  them  side 
by  side,  will  show  how  much  more  vivid  Tennyson  can  be. 

The  tale: 

They  saw  four  armed  horsemen  come  forth  from  the  forest. 

The  poem : 

Enid  was  aware  of  three  tall  knights 
On  horseback,  wholly  arm’d,  behind  a  rock 
In  shadow,  waiting  for  them. 

a 


2339-14 


98 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


The  tale : 

A  group  of  thickly  tangled  copse-wood. 

The  poem : 

In  the  first  shallow  shade  of  a  deep  wood, 

Before  a  gloom  of  stubborn-shafted  oaks. 

The  tale : 

They  came  to  an  open  country,  with  meadows  on  one  hand, 
and  mowers  mowing  the  meadows. 

The  poem : 

Issuing  under  open  heavens  beheld 
A  little  town  with  towers,  upon  a  rock, 

And  close  beneath,  a  meadow  gemlike  chased 
In  the  brown  wild,  and  mowers  mowing  in  it. 

Such  little  pictures,  which  seem  to  come  straight  from  some 
old  illuminated  manuscript,  Tennyson  delighted  in,  and  often, 
as  here,  they  are  elaborated  from  a  mere  hint  in  the  original. 
Not  less  frequently  they  spring  entirely  from  his  own  imagina¬ 
tion,  as  when  we  read  how  Geraint 

remark’d 

The  lusty  mowers  labouring  dinnerless, 

And  watch’d  the  sun  blaze  on  the  turning  scythe, 

And  after  nodded  sleepily  in  the  heat. 

Tennyson  further  enhances  the  poetic  quality  of  his  narra¬ 
tive  by  numerous  similes  which  lend  a  splendour  unknown 
to  the  workaday  prose  of  the  tale.  Most  of  them  are  derived 
from  Tennyson’s  close  observation  of  Nature,  and  the  reader 
is  continually  struck  by  their  appropriateness.  Geraint  in 
his  anger  ‘  smiles  like  a  stormy  sunlight  ’  ;  he  glances  at  Enid 
‘  as  careful  robins  eye  the  delver’s  toil  ’ ;  in  his  festive  array 
he  rides  ‘glancing  like  a  dragon-fly  ’ ;  the  muscles  on  his  arm 
slope  ‘  as  slopes  a  wild  brook  o’er  a  little  stone,  running  too 
vehemently  to  break  upon  it  ’ ;  his  hard  message  to  Enid  falls 
‘  like  flaws  in  summer  laying  lusty  corn  ’  ;  and  Enid  struck  by 
Doorm’s  unknightly  hand,  utters  ‘  a  sharp  and  bitter  cry,  As 
of  a  wild  thing  taken  in  the  trap,  Which  sees  the  trapper 
coming  thro’  the  wood’.  Edyrn  on  his  first  arrival  at  the 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  99 

court  of  Arthur  is  ‘  as  sullen  as  a  beast  new-caged  the  lance 
of  Geraints  foe  splinters  ‘  like  an  icicle’,  and  the  armourers 
at  work  make  a  noise 

As  of  a  broad  brook  o’er  a  shingly  bed 
Brawling,  or  like  a  clamour  of  the  rooks 
At  distance,  ere  they  settle  for  the  night. 

Very  effective  is  the  simile  which  compares  the  panic- 
stricken  flight  of  Geraint’s  enemies  to  that  of  a  shoal  of  fish, 
darting  among  the  shallows,  as  soon  as  a  hand  is  raised 
against  the  sun.  Equally  striking  is  the  way  in  which  the 
overthrow  of  another  opponent  is  narrated  : 

As  he  that  tells  the  tale 
Saw  once  a  great  piece  of  a  promontory 
That  had  a  sapling  growing  on  it,  slide 
From  the  long  shore-cliff’s  windy  walls  to  the  beach, 

And  there  lie  still,  and  yet  the  sapling  grew  ; 

So  lay  the  man  transfixt. 

Two  other  similes,  still  more  elaborate,  may  be  mentioned, 
on  which  Tennyson  has  lavished  all  his  wealth  of  melody  and 
magic  suggestion.  The  first  describes  the  dress  which  Doorm 
offers  Enid  : 

A  splendid  silk  of  foreign  loom, 

Where  like  a  shoaling  sea  the  lovely  blue 
Play’d  into  green,  and  thicker  down  the  front 
With  jewels  than  the  sward  with  drops  of  dew, 

When  all  night  long  a  cloud  clings  to  the  hill, 

And  with  the  dawn  ascending  lets  the  day 
Strike  where  it  clung  ;  so  thickly  shone  the  gems. 

The  other  occurs  in  the  account  of  how  Geraint,  approaching 
the  ruined  hall  of  Yniol,  hears  the  song  of  the  invisible  Enid  : 

As  the  sweet  voice  of  a  bird, 

Heard  by  the  lander  in  a  lonely  isle, 

Moves  him  to  think  what  kind  of  bird  it  is 
That  sings  so  delicately  clear,  and  make 
Conjecture  of  the  plumage  and  the  form  ; 

So  the  sweet  voice  of  Enid  moved  Geraint ; 

And  made  him  like  a  man  abroad  at  morn 
When  first  the  liquid  note  beloved  of  men 

G  2 


100 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


Comes  flying  over  many  a  windy  wave 

To  Britain,  and  in  April  suddenly 

Breaks  from  a  coppice  gemm’d  with  green  and  red, 

And  he  suspends  his  converse  with  a  friend, 

Or  it  may  be  the  labour  of  his  hands, 

To  think  or  say  ‘  There  is  the  nightingale 

In  many  respects  Tennyson’s  poem  is  undoubtedly  superior 
to  the  tale  in  the  Mabinogion.  He  has  knitted  the  story  more 
closely  together,  and  by  the  omission  of  irrelevant  details, 
particularly  about  ceremonies  and  genealogies,  he  has  made 
the  structure  of  the  poem  clearer.  With  this  greater  lucidity 
of  outline  there  goes  a  more  even  flow  of  the  narrative. 
Tennyson’s  Enid  is  also  distinctive  in  that  it  is  a  study  of 
character  rather  than  a  tale  of  adventure  ;  the  personages  are 
more  like  human  beings  and  less  like  the  erratic,  unaccount¬ 
able  creations  of  a  fairy-tale.  The  poem  likewise  displays 
more  skill  than  the  original  by  revealing  character,  not  only 
directly,  but  also  through  environment,  material  and  human. 
Moreover,  Tennyson’s  characters  have  an  ethical  value,  a 
wider  significance  than  those  of  the  tale,  and  (the  poem  is 
altogether  more  varied,  vivid,  dramatic,  and  radiant  with 
poetic  beauty.  Aud  yet  the  transformation  is  not  all  gain. 
There  is  an  artless,  unsophisticated  charm  about  the  tale, 
which  of  necessity  evaporates  in  the  more  subtle  and  resplen¬ 
dent  world  of  Tennyson.  Nor  does  the  tale  know  anything 
of  the  sentimentality  to  which  at  times  Tennyson  draws 
dangerously  near.  However,  the  feeling  which  predominates 
after  a  comparison  of  Enid  with  the  Welsh  original  is  that 
of  admiration  for  so  consummate  an  artist. 

Though  Tennyson’s  familiarity  with  the  Mabinogion  was 
of  incomparably  greater  importance  to  him  than  his  know¬ 
ledge  of  other  Welsh  literatui'e,  one  cannot  fail  to  note  his 
obligations  to  Llywarch  Hen  and  the  Triads.  It  was  the 
reading  of  Llywarch’s  famous  lament  over  the  fallen  Geraint 
that  determined  the  way  in  which  Tennyson  ended  his 
Enid.  The  tale  in  the  Mabinogion  closes  with  a  picture  of 
Geraint’s  prosperous  reign,  during  which  his  ‘  warlike  fame 
and  splendour  lasted  with  renown  and  honour  But  Tenny- 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES  101 

son,  bearing  in  mind  Llywarch’s  elegy  upon  Geraint  after  the 
great  struggle  at  Llongborth,  describes  how  he 

fell 

Against  the  heathen  of  the  Northern  Sea 
In  battle. 

As  for  the  Triads,  there  are  signs  in  various  poems  that 
Tennyson  knew  something  of  these  singular  and  characteristic 
productions  of  Welsh  literature.  One  of  them  is  to  be  found 
in  The  Marriage  of  Geraint,  where  Enid’s  mother,  admiring 
the  beauty  of  her  daughter,  declares  her 

Sweeter  than  the  bride  of  Cassivelaun, 

Flur,  for  whose  love  the  Roman  Caesar  first 
Invaded  Britain, 

and  she  proceeds  to  contrast  the  repulse  of  the  invading 
Caesar  with  the  feeling  of  welcome  that  she  entertains 
towards  the  new  conqueror,  Geraint,  who  is  to  carry  off  Enid. 
In  this  passage  Tennyson  diverges  from  the  genuine  Welsh 
tradition,  which  tells  that  the  beautiful  Flur  was  taken 
captive  by  Mwrchan,  a  Gaulish  prince  in  alliance  with  Caesar, 
to  whom  he  intended  to  present  his  prize.  In  his  anger 
Caswallawn,  as  Cassivelaun  was  called  in  Welsh,  led  an  army 
of  sixty-one  thousand  men  against  Julius  Caesar,  which  did 
not  return  with  its  leader,  and  hence  was  known  as  one  of  the 
three  emigrant  hosts  of  Britain.  It  was  possibly  in  order  to 
win  a  parallel  to  the  story  of  Geraint  and  Enid  that  Tenny¬ 
son  assigned  to  Julius  Caesar  and  Flur  a  relation  somewhat 
different  from  that  given  in  Welsh  legend.1 

Another  reference  to  the  Triads  occurs  in  Gareth  and 
Lynette,  where  Merlin  asks  : 

Know  ye  not  then  the  Riddling  of  the  Bards  ; 

‘  Confusion,  and  illusion,  and  relation, 

Elusion,  and  occasion,  and  evasion  ’  ? 

By  the  riddling  of  the  bards  is  meant  the  Triads ,  which 

1  Exactly  where  he  found  this  legend  we  do  not  know  but  conceivably 
in  Lady  Guest’s  notes  to  ‘  Branwen  the  Daughter  of  Llyr  ’  in  her  ti-ansla- 
tion  of  the  Mabinogion  (1849,  vol.  iii,  pp.  139-40),  where  reference  is 
made  to  the  Triads  from  which  it  sprang. 


102 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


Tennyson  in  The  Coming  of  Arthur  calls  ‘  the  riddling 
triplets  of  old  time  It  is  in  this  connexion  that  Merlin 
utters  three  obscure  stanzas,  ending  with  the  well-known  line  : 

From  the  great  deep  to  the  great  deep  he  goes. 

In  a  note  to  the  collected  edition  of  Tennyson’s  works  we 
are  given  an  explanation  of  Merlin’s  words.  ‘The  truth 
appears  in  different  guise  to  divers  persons.  The  one  fact  is 
that  man  comes  from  the  great  deep  and  returns  to  it’,  and, 
the  note  continues,  *  this  is  an  echo  of  the  triads  of  the  Welsh 
bards  V 

There  is  some  reason  for  thinking  that  Tennyson  may  have 
known  the  Triads  which  Southey  quoted  in  the  notes  to  his 
Madoc.'1 2  At  any  rate  both  poets  were  familiar  with  another 
tradition,  current  among  the  old  Welsh  bards,  namely,  that 
every  ninth  wave  is  greater  than  those  going  before  it. 
Tennyson  makes  use  of  it  in  the  magnificent  passage  which 
relates  the  coming  of  Arthur.  Bleys  and  Merlin  his  disciple, 

1  The  triad  from  which  Tennyson  evolved  his  memorable  line  runs 
thus  :  ‘Animated  Beings  have  three  states  of  Existence,  that  of  Inchoa- 
tion  in  the  Great  Deep  or  Lowest  Point  of  Existence  ;  that  of  Liberty  in 
the  State  of  Humanity ;  and  that  of  Love,  which  is  happiness  in  Heaven  ’. 
Attention  is  drawn  to  this  by  Professor  O.  L.  Jiriczek  ( Anglia ,  Beiblatt, 
1926,  p.  120),  who  also  points  out  another  triad  which,  although  Tenny¬ 
son  does  not  mention  it,  would  surely  appeal  to  him  in  his  symbolical 
interpretation  of  the  Arthurian  legend.  It  runs  thus  :  ‘  There  are  three 
necessary  occasions  of  Inchoation  :  to  collect  the  materials  and  pro¬ 
perties  of  every  nature  ;  to  collect  the  knowledge  of  every  thing;  and 
to  collect  power  towards  subduing  the  Adverse  and  Devastative,  and  for 
the  divestation  of  Evil  ’. 

2  Professor  Jiriczek  suggests  this  and  one  may  regard  it  as  probable. 
It  is  perhaps  worth  noting  that  Edward  Williams,  the  source  of  Southey’s 
information  about  the  Triads ,  in  his  Poems  Lyric  and  Pastoral  (London, 
1794),  vol.  ii,  quotes  that  relating  to  the  three  states  of  existence,  but 
whereas  he  uses  the  word  ‘  felicity  ’,  ‘  happiness  ’  is  used  by  Southey  and 
also  by  Rowe  in  the  commentary  which  Tennyson  authorized.  This 
might  of  course  be  a  mere  coincidence,  but  on  the  other  hand  Tennyson’s 
knowledge  of  the  tradition  of  the  ninth  wave,  a  tradition  mentioned  in 
the  notes  to  Madoc  and  apparently  derived  by  Southey  from  the  Welsh 
scholars  Edward  Williams  and  William  Owen  Pughe,  does  seem  to 
indicate  that  Tennyson  had  profited  by  the  reading  of  Madoc. 


TENNYSON  AND  WALES 


103 


leaving  the  castle  of  Tintagil,  where  Uther  has  just  passed 
away  moaning  for  an  heir,  descend  through  the  inky  darkness 
towards  the  shore.  As  they  gaze  seawards  they  catch  a 
glimpse  of  a  ship  like  a  winged  dragon,  all  bright  with 
shining  figures  : 

And  then  the  two 
Dropt  to  the  cove,  and  watch’d  the  great  sea  fall, 

Wave  after  wave,  each  mightier  than  the  last, 

Till  last,  a  ninth  one,  gathering  half  the  deep 
And  full  of  voices,  slowly  rose  and  plunged 
Roaring,  and  all  the  wave  was  in  a  flame  ; 

And  down  the  wave  and  in  the  flame  was  borne 
A  naked  babe,  and  rode  to  Merlin’s  feet, 

Who  stoopt  and  caught  the  babe,  and  cried,  ‘  The  King !  ’ 

Herbert  G.  Wright. 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  IIALI  MEIBIIA  D 


I 

THE  Ancrene  Wisse  has  already  developed  a  ‘  literature 
and  it  is  very  possible  that  nothing  I  can  say  about  it  will 
be  either  new  or  illuminating  to  the  industrious  or  leisured 
that  have  kept  up  with  it.  I  have  not.  But  my  interest  in 
this  document  is  linguistic,  and  unless  I  am  mistaken,  a  purely 
linguistic  aspect  of  the  problem  will  bear  renewed  attention, 
or  repetition.  I  even  believe  that  it  may  be  of  value  to 
set  forth  a  line  of  argument  that  is  based  on  assertions  of 
which  the  proper  proof  (or  retractation)  must  wait  for  a  later 
occasion. 

I  start  with  the  conviction  that  verj^  few  Middle  English 
texts  represent  in  detail  the  real  language  (in  accidence, 
phonology,  often  even  in  choice  of  spellings)  of  any  one  time 
or  place  or  person.  It  is  not  to  be  expected  that  they  should, 
in  a  period  of  manuscript  reproduction  and  linguistic  decentrali¬ 
zation  ;  and  most  of  them  in  fact  do  not.  Their  ‘  language  ’ 
is,  in  varying  degrees,  the  product  of  their  textual  history,  and 
cannot  be  fully  explained,  sometimes  cannot  be  understood  at 
all,  by  reference  to  geography. 

If  this  is  not  universally  agreed,  it  cannot  here  be  fully 
argued.  At  least  it  will  be  allowed,  whether  by  those  who 
prefer  to  find  a  place  on  the  map  for  each  variety  of  ‘  textual  ’ 
English,  or  those  that  would  find  subtle  phonetic  significance  in 
all  the  vagaries  of  careless  texts,  that  there  is  a  distinction 
between  a  pure  and  consistent  form  of  language  and  a  con¬ 
fused  one,  and  that  the  distinction  is  important,  however 
explained.  This  will  still  leave  some  force  in  my  argument. 

The  mixed  nonce-language  produced  by  copying  is  some¬ 
thing  different,  and  something  to  a  considerable  extent  dis¬ 
tinguishable  by  analysis  from  the  variations,  the  exceptional 
forms  requiring  special  explanation,  that  appear  in,  say,  the 
language  of  Orm  or  Dan  Michel — where  we  may  assume  that 


ANCRENE  WJSSE  AND  IIALI  M Elf) HA  I)  105 

we  have  for  practical  purposes  a  representation  of  two  kinds 
of  1  geographical  ’  English.  For  one  thing  these  exceptions 
are  mainly  exceptions  only  to  the  general  character  of  the 
language  and  the  normal  lines  of  its  descent  from  older  forms, 
not  exceptions  to  the  writer’s  usage.  He  uses  them  invariably, 
or  in  specific  cases,  or  in  circumstances  capable  of  reasonable 
explanation.  In  fact  they  are  comparable  to  the  observed 
variations  in  the  living  speech  of  actual  persons  and  places. 

‘  Nonce-language  ’  can,  of  course,  be  produced  in  two  different 
ways.  By  partial  substitution  of  a  dialect  or  spelling-system 
more  familiar  than  that  of  the  copy  ;  by  unsuccessful  assimila¬ 
tion  of  a  natural  speech  to  a  written  ‘  standard  ’,  more  or  less 
definite.  But  to  distinguish  these  is  probably  not,  at  any 
rate  in  early  Middle  English,  of  linguistic  importance.  The 
result  of  both  is  an  1  accidental  ’  form  of  language,  occurring 
in  all  its  details  only  in  one  text,  whose  evidence  thus  requires 
careful  handling  if  it  is  to  be  used  in  the  history  of  spoken 
English.  Attempted  ‘  standardization  ’  is  not  likely  to  concern 
a  student  of  the  thirteenth  century ;  he  is  more  likely  to  be 
faced  with  the  alteration  of  the  unfamiliar.1 

But  texts  such  as  the  Ormulum  or  the  Ayenbite  of  Inwit, 
where  all  may  believe  in  the  language  as  genuine  and  more 
or  less  ‘  geographical  ’,  are  rare.  We  have  not  enough  of  them 
for  the  separating  out  of  the  different  main  types  that  are 

1  In  the  thirteenth  century  a  westernizing  tendency  has  been  discerned, 
I  think  with  probability.  It  does  not,  of  course,  amount  to  the  existence 
of  a  West  Midland  literary  standard.  But  many  of  the  problems  of 
thirteenth-century  texts  (e.  g.  The  Oiol  and  Nightingale)  would  become 
more  intelligible  on  the  assumption,  natural  enough  a  priori,  that  the 
habit  of  using  or  writing  down  English  with  any  definitely  literary  pur¬ 
pose  was  at  first  preserved  in  the  West  mainly,  and  connected  with  the 
lingering  there  of  links  with  the  past  (in  alliteration  and  all  that 
implies,  in  spelling,  and  in  an  archaic  and  relatively  undisturbed  form  of 
language) ;  that  scribes  able  to  handle  M.E.  familiarly  were  more  often 
trained  in  the  West  and  natively  or  otherwise  familiar  with  western 
English.  Consideration  of  Ancrene  Wisse,  at  any  rate,  strengthens  the 
impression,  if  my  argument  is  sound,  of  the  existence  in  the  west  of  a 
centre  where  English  was  at  once  more  alive,  and  more  traditional  and 
organized  as  a  written  form,  than  anywhere  else. 


106  ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  HALI  MEIEUAD 

ingredients  in  cases  of  confusion.  All  the  more  reason  for 
underlining  the  names  of  those  that  we  have. 

There  is  an  English  older  than  Dan  Michel  s  and  richer,  as 
regular  in  spelling  as  Orm’s  but  less  queer ;  one  that  has 
preserved  something  of  its  former  cultivation.  It  is  not 
a  language  long  relegated  to  the  ‘  uplands  struggling  once 
more  for  expression  in  apologetic  emulation  of  its  betters  or 
out  of  compassion  for  the  lewd,  but  rather  one  that  has  never 
fallen  back  into  ‘  lewdness  and  has  contrived  in  troublous 
times  to  maintain  the  air  of  a  gentleman,  if  a  country  gentle¬ 
man.  It  has  traditions  and  some  acquaintance  with  books  and 
the  pen,  but  it  is  also  in  close  touch  with  a  good  living 
speech— a  soil  somewhere  in  England. 

This  is  the  language  first  and  foremost  of  the  Coi'pus 
Christi  MS.  of  the  Ancrene  Wisse,  the  Ancrene  Wisse  proper. 
This  manuscript  is  of  course  admitted  to  be  a  good  text 
(the  clerical  errors  in  it  are  astonishingly  few);  and  it  is 
well  known  to  be  in  a  fair  hand  of  excellent  regularity  and 
precision.  It  is  even  allowed  to  stand  nearer  to  the  original 
than,  say,  the  Cotton  Nero  MS.  But  I  suggest  that  this  is  not 
nearly  strong  enough.  Whatever  the  textual  history  of  the 
Ancrene  TEisse  may  be,  or  the  merits  and  interest  of  its  matter, 
this  text  has  an  even  more  unusual  claim  to  attention.  Its 
language  is  self-consistent  and  unadulterated.  It  is  a  unity. 
It  is  either  a  faithful  transcript  of  some  actual  dialect 
of  nearly  unmixed  descent,  or  a  1  standard  ’  language  based 
on  one. 

But  this,  if  true,  possesses  an  interest  for  others  than  the 
linguistic  analyst.  Such  a  fact  must  have  a  bearing  on  the 
questions  where  and  when,  and  so  even  on  the  more  academic 
questions  by  and  for  whom,  that  are  put  concerning  the 
writing  of  the  Rule.  If  it  is  true,  we  may  argue  thus : 

(i)  A  is  written  in  a  language  (A)  that  is  at  once  self- 
consistent  and  markedly  individual.  It  stands  out  among 
Middle  English  texts,  not  excluding  the  Ayenbite  or  the 
Ormulum,  by  reason  of  the  regularity  of  its  phonology  and 
its  accidence.  It  represents,  therefore,  a  form  of  English 
whose  development  from  an  antecedent  Old  English  type 


ANGRENE  WISSE  AND  HALI  MEW  HAD  107 

was  relatively  little  disturbed.  Relative  isolation  and  more 
or  less  definite  natural  boundaries  are  suggested  by  this. 

(ii)  This  language  is  expressed  in  a  very  consistent  and 
in  some  ways  very  individual  spelling. 

(iii)  These  considerations  taken  together  suggest  a  simple 
textual  history,  or  at  least  a  peculiarly  fortunate  one.1  The 
normal  result  of  varied  copying  in  such  a  period  as  the 
Middle  English  one  would  be  to  destroy  the  consistency  of 
language  and  spelling,  unless  tlte  scribe  or  scribes  used 
naturally  the  same  language  as  that  of  their  originals.  At 
any  rate  this  ‘  normal  result  ’  is  admittedly  present  in  all 
the  other  versions  of  the  Ancrene  Wisse.  All  of  these  have 
in  fact  the  appearance  of  a  blending  with  the  language  (A) 
of  ingredients  belonging  to  different  times  and  places. 
The  (A)  element  is  their  common  linguistic  element.2  This 
throws  into  still  stronger  relief  the  absence  of  such  blending 
in  A. 

Here  I  think  we  have  to  consider  a  further  point.  It  is 
not  an  entirely  new  one,  though,  unless  I  am  mistaken,  its 
force  is  not  usually  appreciated.  This  language  (A)  is  identical, 
even  down  to  minute  and  therefore  significant  details,  with 
the  language  of  MS.  Bodley  34,  that  is,  of  the  versions  there 
contained  of  the  legends  of  Juliene,  K uterine,  Margarete,  and 
of  the  homilies  8a ides  Warde  and  Hali  Meidhad.  This  is  the 
so-called  ‘  Katherine  group  ’.  The  ‘  Hali  Meidhad  group  ’ 
would  have  been  a  fitter  title.  I  will  call  it  here  B  ;  its 
language  (B). 

A  connexion  between  (A)  and  (B)  is  of  course  recognized. 
Hall,  for  instance,  said  that  ‘  MS.  B  bears  a  close  resemblance 
in  all  dialectal  criteria  to  MS.  A  of  the  Ancrene  Wisse  though 
he  declared  its  ‘  Anglian  peculiarities  are  somewhat  more 
pronounced  ’  (a  judgement  I  do  not  understand).3  A  vague 
recognition  of  the  similarity  is  hidden  away  in  pages  7 

1  'there  is  no  analysable  difference  that  I  can  discover  between  those 
parts  of  A  which  are  absent  from  other  versions,  or  differ  from  them, 
and  the  common  mass.  The  whole  is  in  language  (A). 

2  This  is  not  universally  agreed. 

3  E.  M.  E.,  ii,  p.  503. 


108  ANGBENE  WISSE  AND  HALT  MEIBHAD 


and  8  of  Jordan’s  M.E.  Grammatik.  But  the  case  is  far  more 
remarkable  and  important.  At  the  very  least  we  have  here 
a  closeness  of  relationship  between  the  language  and  the 
spelling  of  two  distinct  MSS.  and  hands  that  is  astonishing, 
if  not  (as  I  believe)  unique.  I  will  even  suggest  here  that 
the  unity  of  (A)  and  (B)  will  bear  minute  analysis,  and  leave 
a  residuum  of  discrepancy  which,  in  view  of  the  quite  different 
textual  history  and  value  of  B,  is  negligible.  The  two  manu¬ 
scripts  are  in  fact  in  one  language  and  spelling  (AB).  And  this 
is  found,  as  far  as  I  am  aware,  nowhere  else.  That  is,  though 
it  may  be  even  a  preponderating  element  in  other  texts, 
especially  other  versions  of  the  same  matter,  it  is  not  else¬ 
where  found  in  isolation  ;  nowhere  else  is  it  present  in  so 
consistent  and  regular  a  form,  and  in  all  its  details  of  grammar 
and  spelling. 

The  nearest  approach  that  I  know  of  is  to  be  found  in  the 
K,  versions 1  of  B’s  material  (all  the  above  named  except  Halt 
Meifthad).  Nearly  identical  (‘  substantially  the  same  ’  was 
Hall’s  judgement)  as  R’s  language  appears  at  first  sight  with 
(AB),  it  is  not,  especially  in  spelling,  actually  the  same.  Its 
closeness  to  B,  which  is  a  copy  of  the  same  matter,  cannot  be 
compared  with  the  linguistic  relationship  of  B  to  A,  which  are 
totally  distinct  in  matter.  Its  very  closeness  to  B  can  be  made 
to  illustrate  the  peculiar  relationship  of  B  to  A.  If  one  is 
thoroughly  familiar  with  the  idiosyncrasies  of  A,  one  may  then 
look  at,  say,  Einenkel’s  text  of  St.  Katherine  (which  is  chiefly 
based  on  R)  and  mark,  without  reference  to  the  apparatus,  the 
majority  of  the  cases  in  which  the  printed  text  diverges  in 
forms  or  spellings  from  B,  and  probably  predict  what  the 
apparatus  will  show  the  B  forms  to  be.  That  is,  language  (B) 
may  be  learned  through  (A),  or  vice  versa.  This  is  my  own 
experience. 

I  suggest  that  this  sort  of  thing  is  not  usual  in  Middle 
English,  and  requires  special  consideration.  We  have  two 
scribes  that  use  a  language  and  spelling  that  are  nearly  as 
indistinguishable  as  that  of  two  modern  printed  books.  Since 
the  conditions  in  Middle  English  were  quite  different  to  those 
1  MS.  B.  Mus.  Royal  17  A  27. 


ANCRENE  W1SSE  AND  HA  LI  ME  WHAT)  109 

of  the  present,  it  is  a  reasonable  further  step  to  suppose  that 
A  and  B  are  very  closely  connected  both  in  time  and  place. 
The  consistency  and  individuality  of  the  spelling,  since  it  is 
shared  by  two  hands  of  very  different  quality,  is  not  that  of 
an  Orm,  of  an  isolated  methodist,  but  suggests  obedience  to 
some  school  or  authority. 

There  have  been,  of  course,  at  different  times  various 
localizations  and  datings,  vague  or  specific,  of  the  originals 
of  the  works  contained  in  A  and  B.  They  have  been  assigned 
to  places  as  widely  sundered  as  Dorset,  Lichfield,  and  the 
‘  Northern  border  of  the  (East)  Midlands  But,  if  I  am  right, 
the  A  and  B  versions  are  not  to  be  separated  at  all. 

How  much  further  one  would  go  after  this  depends  on 
one’s  views  of  transmission  in  the  Middle  English  period.  At 
any  rate  it  is  clear  that,  if  any  of  the  parts  of  A  or  pieces  in 
B  were  not  originally  composed  in  this  dialect,  in  the  time 
and  place  to  which  the  manuscripts  belong,  they  were  then 
and  there  not  only  copied  but  accurately  translated — so 
accurately  that  there  is  practically  no  trace  left  of  the 
process.1 

I  suggest,  then,  that  the  very  nature  of  the  language  (AB) 
requires  us  in  all  probability  to  suppose,  either  : 

(i)  that  A  or  B  or  both  are  originals. 

This  can  only  be  decided  on  other  grounds ;  in  the  case 
of  B,  at  any  rate,  no  claim  for  originality  could  be  made. 

or  (ii)  that  A  or  B  or  both  are  in  whole  or  part  accurate 
translations,  a  phenomenon  that  requires  special  explana¬ 
tion. 

or  (iii)  that  the  vanished  originals  of  A  and  B  were  in 
this  same  language  (AB),  and  so  belonged  to  practically 
the  same  period  and  place  as  the  copies  we  have  (unless 
alie  have  transcribed  them  with  minute  linguistic  fidelity). 

1  No  linguistic  trace,  that  is.  Textual  considerations  are  not  here 
concerned.  B  may  offer  an  indifferent  text,  and  evidence  that  it  is  more 
or  less  removed  in  this  respect  from  its  originals,  but  it  do.es  not  offer 
an  indifferent  language.  This  is  either  that  of  the  originals  or  there  has 
been  accurate  translation — the  unlikelihood  of  which  is  only  increased 
by  the  assumption  of  an  inaccurate  text. 


110  ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  HA  LI  MEILJIIAD 


In  the  case  of  A,  then,  either  (i)  A  is  the  original  Ancrene 
Hme  (here  only  a  supposition  for  the  sake  of  argument) ;  or 
(ii)  A  is  a  linguistically  skilful  translation  of  some  version  of 
it,  which  may  contain  additions  and  alterations  due  to  the 
actual  translator ;  or  (iii)  the  original  Ancrene  Wisse  was  in 
language  (AB),  and  therefore  belonged  to  nearly  the  same 
time  and  place  as  A,  and  any  intermediate  stages  there  may 
have  been.  If  the  matter  peculiar  to  A  is  unoriginal,  it 
belongs  at  least  to  very  nearly  the  same  time  and  place  as 
the  original,  and  possesses  so  much  the  more  authority.  It 
may  even  constitute  a  second  edition  within  the  knowledge 
of  the  author. 

In  the  case  of  B  we  have  not  probably  to  deal  either  with 
an  original  or  with  an  original  translation,  but  with  a  copy 
of  pieces  that  were  severally  either  originally  composed  in 
language  (AB),  or  translated  into  it  at  some  previous  time 
not  far  removed  from  the  making  of  B,  and  in  the  place  to 
which  B  belongs. 

But  we  can  dismiss  some  of  these  suppositions  as  highly 
improbable,  if  not  incredible.  There  is  very  little  evidence, 
I  think,  in  Middle  English  of  accurate  transcription  of 
unfamiliar  dialect.  Nor  is  it  to  be  expected.  It  is  notoriously 
easy  to  adulterate  a  closely  related  and  generally  intelligible 
form  of  the  same  language  (dialectal  or  archaic),  even  when 
the  intention  is  consciously  the  reverse.  Yet  scribes,  save 
in  exceptional  circumstances  (e.  g.  forgery),  were  concerned 
with  matter,  not  linguistic  detail.  If  they  were  not  merely 
inattentive,  in  which  case  familiar  forms  would  creep  in 
unnoticed,  they  were  more  likely  deliberately  to  substitute 
the  familiar  than  to  preserve  the  unusual.  In  the  absence 
of  a  standard  they  must  often  have  failed  even  to  observe, 
let  alone  to  consider  important,  many  orthographic  and 
linguistic  details  that  our  analysis  regards  as  fundamental. 
It  needs  constant  attention  to  each  word  if  a  piece  of  text 
that  differs  from  the  copyist’s  own  language  or  spelling 
habits  is  to  be  preserved  unadulterated.  This  is  tested 
easily  enough  by  copying,  say,  either  a  piece  of  earlier  modern 
English,  or  an  Old  Norse  MS.  In  both  cases  the  divergences 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  TIA LI  MEW11AD  111 

between  the  copy  and  the  copyist’s  habits  have  little  or  no 
bearing  on  meaning  and  matter,  and  some  special  motive  is 
required  if  they  are  to  be  retained  consistently. 

On  the  other  hand,  for  consistent  and  accurate  translation 
of  one  M.E.  dialect  into  another  a  knowledge  in  detail  is 
demanded  of  both  dialects,  as  well  as  a  recognition  that  they 
are  distinct  forms  of  language — a  philological  state  of  mind, 
rather  than  a  scribal.  And  there  is  still  required  a  special 
motive  for  taking  the  necessary  trouble.  What  motive  or 
special  circumstance  can  be  suggested  that  will  make  the 
supposition  of  ‘  accurate  translation  ’  in  any  way  credible 
for  A  and  B  ?  Such  translation  can  only  be  explained  if 
the  form  of  language  substituted  was  held  to  have  some 
special  value,  was  in  fact  somewhere  a  ‘  standard  ’  that  it 
was  worth  considerable  pains  to  maintain.  This  is  possible, 
if  not  very  probable,  in  the  abstract.  But  in  the  case,  at  any 
rate,  of  B  it  is  hardly  worth  considering.  B  is  not  the  text 
that  would  be  produced  by  a  person  capable  of  such  pains. 
And  if  we  examine  the  other  versions  of  B,  I  submit  that  it 
is  language  (AB)  that  lies  behind  each  of  them,  not  some 
other  type  from  which  B  or  its  immediate  antecedents  were 
‘  translated  ’. 

I  also  submit,  though  the  case  is  far  more  intricate  and 
totally  different  conclusions  have  been  reached,  that  the  same 
is  true  of  A ;  that  the  least  forced  explanation  of  the 
linguistic  state  of  the  other  versions  of  the  Ancrene  Wisse  is 
that  behind  them,  at  different  removes,  lies  an  original  in 
language  (AB). 

Yet  even  if  this  is  not  to  be  demonstrated  or  agreed,  I  sug¬ 
gest  that  the  supposition  of  ‘  translation  ’,  as  the  explanation 
of  the  purity  of  the  language  (AB)  in  A  and  B,  remains  far 
less  probable  or  credible  than  the  belief  that  the  originals  of 
A  and  B  were  in  the  same  language  and  spelling  (AB),  and 
therefore  belonged  to  much  the  same  time  and  place.  It 
is  a  belief  which  is  at  least  supported  by  the  connexion 
that  is  thus  established  between  the  nature  of  the  language 
and  spelling  of  these  texts  on  the  one  hand,  and  their  literary 
and  stylistic  quality  on  the  other.  Both  point  to  a  place  where 


112  ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  HALT  MEIBHAD 


native  tradition  was  not  wholly  confused  or  broken  ;  both 
point  to  a  centre  where  the  native  language  was  not  unfamiliar 
with  the  pen  ;  it  is  not  surprising  if  they  both  point  to  the 
same  place. 

I  believe  then  that,  if  what  is  here  asserted  concerning  the 
character  and  relations  of  languages  (A)  and  (B)  is  true  (my 
present  conviction),  it  is  far  and  away  the  most  probable 
deduction  that  A  and  B  are  substantially  in  the  very  language 
of  the  original  works,  and  belong  to  the  same  place  and  at 
least  approximately  the  same  time  as  those  works  and  their 
authors  (or  author).  To  a  linguist  they  are,  in  other  words, 
virtually  originals. 

There  are  two  possible  modifications  of  this  deduction  that 
have  not  yet  been  dealt  with  :  the  relations  of  the  linguistic 
date  of  (AB)  to  the  palaeographic  dates  of  A  and  B  ;  and  the 
question  of  originals  not  in  Middle  English  at  all. 

It  might,  for  instance,  be  convenient  to  some  theory  of 
authorship  to  suppose  that  the  originals  of  A  and  B  were 
written  considerably  earlier  than  the  date  assignable  on 
palaeographic  grounds  (or  internal  evidence)  to  the  manu¬ 
scripts. 

The  linguistic  comment  on  any  such  theory  would,  to  my 
mind,  be  this.  There  is  little  trace  in  (AB)  of  mixture  of 
forms  of  periods  sufficiently  separate  in  time  to  differ  in 
orthographic  or  linguistic  usage.1  But  the  scribe  who  resists 
successfully  the  tendency  to  modernize,  not  in  a  legal  instru¬ 
ment  but  in  aj,  work  intended  precisely  for  the  instruction  of 
his  contemporaries,  is  incredible.  It  is  highly  improbable 
therefore  that  (AB)  is  a  language  already  archaic  or  even 
old-fashioned  when  either  A  or  B  were  made.  In  that  case 
only  the  supposition  remains  that  the  modernization  has  been 
thorough,  accurate,  and  deliberate.  But  this  is  only  a  special 
case  of  the  ‘  translation  ’  dealt  with  above.  The  period  of 
time  intervening,  therefore,  between  the  originals  and  the 
copies  A,  B,  is  not  likely  to  have  been  one  linguistically 
measurable.  What  sort  of  limit  in  years  this  would  involve 

1  Occasional  uses  of  £  for  g,  of  s  for  r,  might  be  instanced,  but  do  not 
prove  much. 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  MALI  MEIBHAD  113 

round  about  A.r>.  1200  is  less  easy  to  say;  and  we  have  to 
consider  in  this  case  the  greater  resistance  to  change  of  a 
language  that  was  probably  (as  suggested  above)  both 
relatively  isolated  and  cultivated.  None  the  less  I  think  that 
we  should  not  on  linguistic  grounds  willingly  concede  more 
than  a  decade  or  two ;  and  on  this  point  I  shall  try  to  bring 
forward  a  sample  of  linguistic  evidence  (below). 

Further  it  might  be  suggested,  and  has  been,  and  still  is, 
that  the  originals  of  A  and  B  were  not  English  at  all,  but 
French  or  Latin.  The  case  of  B  is  not  debated.  Some  of 
the  pieces  (e.  g.  Sawles  Warde)  are  known  to  be  translations, 
or  rather  free  handlings,  of  Latin  sources.  But  the  treatment 
observed  is  so  free  as  to  rob  it  of  almost  all  linguistic 
interest;  it  is  of  a  kind  that  produces  language  little  if 
anything  inferior  to  that  of  free  composition,  and  it  is 
almost  equally  good  evidence  of  the  literary  cultivation 
of  the  English  medium  ;  it  is  not  novice  translation-prose 
at  all. 

It  is  quite  possible  that  where  the  English  originals  of  B 
were  so  produced  A  also  might  have  been  translated,  though 
A  appears  to  rise  even  higher  above  the  suspicion  of  being 
translation-prose.  But  the  proof,  one  way  or  the  other,  is 
outside  the  scope  of  linguistic  analysis.  This  debate  belongs 
to  a  different  field.1 


1  It  might,  however,  be  observed  that  certain  odd  genders  occur  in 
both  A  and  B.  dead  is,  for  instance,  occasionally  feminine  in  A  and  B. 
Where  the  genders  of  nouns  are  discernible  and  yet  different  from  those 
of  O.E.  they  follow  Latin  or  French.  So  I  believe,  but  I  have  not  made 
full  collections  on  this  point.  It  might  be  worth  while,  if  it  has  not 
already  been  done.  This  might  be  taken  as  an  indication  of  translation. 
Yet  it  is  difficult  to  believe  that  such  competent  translation  would  in  fact 
make  such  errors.  If  ascribable  to  the  influence  of  French  or  Latin  at 
all,  such  confusion  of  genders  is  more  likely  to  be  the  reflection  of  the 
general  influence  of  a  knowledge  of  these  languages  upon  this  culti¬ 
vated  sort  of  English.  English  of  this  period  was  more  open  to  attack 
in  the  accidence  of  nouns  and  adjectives  than  anywhere  else.  In  other 
words,  we  may  have  here  a  genuine  minor  feature  of  the  language 
(AB)  such  as  might  appear  in  talking — an  actual  example  of  one  of  the 
stages  in  the  history  of  the  loss  of  gender  of  which  historical  grammars 


2339-14 


H 


114  ANGRENE  WISSE  AND  HA  LI  MEIHHAD 

Proof  or  supposition  of  a  foreign  original  still  requires  us 
in  tracing  the  history  of  the  English  version  to  follow  the 
same  line  of  argument  from  the  nature  of  the  language  (AB) 
as  that  already  laboured.  The  final  conclusion  that  I  suggest 
is  that  the  (English)  originals  of  these  works  were  in 
language  (AB),  they  both  belonged  to  nearly  the  same  time, 
one  not  far  removed  from  that  of  the  actual  manuscripts  A 
and  B ;  and  they  both  belonged  to  the  same  (small)  area,  the 
area  where  manuscripts  A  and  B  and  their  language  (AB) 
were  at  home. 

The  localization  or  dating  of  either  the  manuscripts,  or  the 
language,  of  A  and  B  is  then  of  much  greater  importance  to 
the  general  problem  of  the  Ancrene  Wis.se  than  has  been 
allowed. 

I  am  not  equipped,  nor  have  I  studied  the  question  of  this 
localization  sufficiently,  to  venture  an  opinion.  It  is  none  the 
less,  to  say  no  more,  highly  suggestive  that  A  alone  of  the 
manuscripts  of  Ancrene  Wisse  is  definitely  connected  with 
Herefordshire,  and  that  the  same  is  true  of  B.  It  is  certainly 
odd  that  two  manuscripts,  which  at  the  very  least  have  every 
appearance  of  being  closely  connected  in  place  of  origin, 
should  both  have  wandered  to  that  somewhat  remote  county 
in  the  fourteenth  century,  if  they  did  not  originally  belong 
there.  Historians  and  others  may  decide  whether  Hereford¬ 
shire  could  offer  the  centre  we  require  ;  there  are,  at  any  rate, 
many  linguistic  considerations  that  are  in  its  favour,  and  none 
yet  to  hand  (so  far  as  I  am  aware)  that  are  against  it.1  There 


speak  but  seldom  furnish  instances.  A  specially  interesting  case  is, 
I  think,  furnished  by  Halt  Meilhad  148  ff.  There  flesch  is  referred  to  as 
ha  ‘  she  ’.  This  has  completely  misled  the  modern  English  translator, 
who  writes  nonsense ;  and  has  also  misled  the  scribe  into  misuse  of  the 
pi.  form  hearmil  148  for  the  required  sg.  hear  met)  (ha  also  means 
‘  they’). 

1  The  Scandinavian  element,  has,  of  course,  been  used  as  an  argument 
against  the  West  in  general.  Though  we,  or  rather  I,  do  not  know 
enough  about  the  distribution  of  words  in  Middle  English  to  speak  with 
finality,  where  phonology  does  not  help,  I  believe  this  to  be  altogether 
erroneous.  Hall  was  led,  for  instance,  by  the  Scandinavian  element  to 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  HALT  MEIBHAD  115 

is  relative  isolation  ,  which  endures  to  this  day,  between 
Wye  and  Severn,  where  an  individual  linguistic  development 
might  be  expected  to  take  place  little  disturbed,  and  yet  show 
intelligible  geographical  relation  to  the  forms  of  English  that 
seem  most  nearly  allied  (e.  g.  Layamon) ;  there  is  proximity 
to  Wales— a  minor  point,  but  aider  occurs  in  Hall  MeHShad 
and  Ancrene  Wisse  only ;  there  is  remoteness  from  the  East 
and  from  London,  which  may  explain  the  preservation  of 

look  in  the  N.E.  Midlands  for  author  and  originals.  Yet  if  anything 
suggests  itself  to  a  general  consideration  of  this  element,  it  is  that  its 
connexion  is  nearly  as  close  with  western  tradition  and  alliteration  as 
that  of  the  native  element. 

The  view  of  Hall  and  others  appears  to  have  been  that  the  Scandi¬ 
navian  words  in  A  and  B  are  a  N.E.  element  found  in  their  copies,  but 
alien  to  the  language  of  the  1  translators  ’—who  thus  could  only  have  know¬ 
ledge  of  the  words  from  the  spelling  and  context  of  a  written  N.E. 
original.  Then  what  are  we  to  think  of  these  scholarly  westerners  ?  Not 
content  with  being  the  most  efficient  dialect  translators  in  M.E.  they 
transform  alien  Norse  words  from  their  natural  eastern  shape  into  pre¬ 
cisely  the  form  they  should  have  had  if  they  were  ancestral  in  the  West. 
Somewhere  in  Herefordshire  there  must  have  been  a  school  of  philology, 
which  encouraged  phonology  as  well  as  a  study  of  genuine  Norse  rather 
than  its  corruption  in  eastern  England.  I  refer,  of  course,  to  such  words 
as  flutten,  hulien ,  which  in  the  East  were  pronounced  and  written  with  i 
(Orm  flitten n),  though  derived  from  O.N.  flytia ,  liylia.  The  ending  of 
hulien  is  also  decisively  against  the  East,  see  Part  II.  meoc  might  also  be 
adduced.  The  eo-spelling  is  invariable,  and  marks  out  the  word  at  once 
to  the  eye  in  (AB),  since  it  does  not  conform,  owing  to  its  later  adoption 
from  O.N.  *meuk-r ,  to  the  ‘  Anglian  smoothing  ’  characteristic  of  the  lan¬ 
guage  (O.E.  seoc  is  see).  How  was  this  correct  historical  and  phonetic 
distinction  observed,  if  not  guided  by  colloquial  knowledge?  Orm’s 
spelling  meoc  cannot  explain  it,  for  it  is  not  invariable;  he  also  writes 
mec,  mek.  And  there  is  small  likelihood  of  any  easterly  text  ever  having 
existed  that  surpassed  Orm  in  consistency,  especially  in  the  application 
of  the  combination  eo,  when  we  consider  that  in  the  East,  if  any  phonetic 
distinction  lingered  between  e-and  eo,  it  was  slight  and  of  a  different  kind 
from  that  preserved  in  the  West.  But  if  Norse  words  phonologically 
testable  resist  the  attempt  to  derive  them  from  written  N.E.  texts,  the 
remainder  will  require  strong  evidence  indeed  of  limited  distribution 
before  they  can  be  used  as  an  argument.  A  and  B  are  rather  documents 
for  a  history  of  the  Scandinavian  element  in  England,  than  to  be  ex¬ 
plained  away  so  as  to  fit  a  previous  view  of  its  distribution. 

H  2 


116  ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  HALT  M FIERI  AD 

something  of  old  tradition  and  the  archaism  ;  and  there  is 
the  intimate  relation  of  the  vocabulary  and  formulas  (allitera¬ 
tive  and  other)  in  A  and  B  both  to  the  westerly  lyric,  whose 
little  world  lay  between  Wirral  and  the  Wye,1  and  to  the 
specifically  alliterative  verse. 

I  have  not  dared  to  apply  my  linguistic  theory  to  the 
questions  ‘by  whom’  and  ‘for  whom’.  It  can  clearly  say 
little  here  except  indirectly  and  through  the  answers  to 
‘  where  ’  and  ‘  when  ’.  1  By  whom  ’  and  ‘  for  whom  ’  are  senti¬ 
mental  questions,  and  knowledge  at  any  rate  of  the  latter  is 
not  likely  to  have  any  importance  to  scholarship.  Neither 
is  likely  to  be  answered  with  certainty  by  any  form  of  re¬ 
search,  short  of  miraculous  luck.  If  one  considers  the  throngs 
of  folk  in  the  fair  field  of  the  English  centuries,  busy  and 
studious,  learned  and  lewd,  esteemed  and  infamous,  that  must 
have  lived  without  leaving  a  shred  of  surviving  evidence  for 
their  existence,  one  will  hesitate  before  the  most  ingenious 
guesses  of  the  most  untiring  researchers  at  the  names  and 
identities  of  the  original  Canterbury  pilgrims.  The  ‘  dear 
sisters  ’  are  as  little  likely  to  have  left  a  record  in  this  world. 
Their  instructor  is  in  more  hopeful  case ;  yet  (even  in 
Herefordshire)  there  may  have  been  more  than  one  wise 
clerk  who  left  no  monument,  or  left  a  monument  without 
a  name. 

Linguistic  analysis  at  any  rate  will  not  help  us  in  a  search 
for  him,  save  in  indicating  the  probable  time  and  place  to 
look  in.  Though  personally  I  entirely  agree  with  all  that 
Hall  said  (E.M.E.,  ii.  505  f.)  concerning  the  community  of 
authorship  of  A  and  B  (not  his  identification),  and  think  it 
as  probable  as  any  such  theory  can  be,2  it  must  be  admitted 

1  From  Weye  he  is  wisist  in  to  Wyrhale,  Johon  27. 

2  The  difference  in  spirit  between  the  manner  and  matter  of  A  and  B 
has  become  a  commonplace,  but  depends  on  a  forgetfulness  of  the  very 
nature  of  an  anchoress’s  life  and  the  spirit  that  approved  it  (as  the 
instructor  must  have  done),  and  on  a  misunderstanding  of  the  teaching 
and  spirit  of  B,  an  exaggeration  of  the  ‘  humanity  ’  of  A  the  practical 
adviser  and  of  the  ‘  inhumanity  ’  of  B  the  furnisher  of  edifying  reading. 
Flagellation,  which  A  disapproves,  is  not  more  stem  than  enclosure  and 


117 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  II A  LI  MEIBHAD 

that  the  linguistic  character  of  the  texts  does  not  oblige  us 
to  believe  in  a  common  author.  Where  two  different  scribes 
could  write  a  common  language  in  the  same  spelling,  two 
different  authors  could  conceivably  have  written  under  the 
influence  of  a  common  training,  reading,  and  tradition. 


II 

It  was  originally  my  intention  to  follow  this  laborious 
argument  with  a  sample  of  a  minute  comparison  of  A  and  B. 
But  this  has  proved  impossible  of  satisfactory  accomplish¬ 
ment  within  a  very  little  space.  To  give  a  brief  list  of  the 
peculiar  agreements  in  language  and  spelling  between  the 
two  texts,  without  recording  and  discussing  the  minor  dis¬ 
crepancies,  would  also  be  unconvincing,  though  the  agree¬ 
ment  might  be  conceded  as  remarkable. 

I  may  briefly  instance,  however,  one  line  of  inquiry  and 
its  bearings.  The  most  important  group  of  words  in  any 
early  M.E.text  (if  one  considers  date  or  region,  or  text  corrup¬ 
tion,  01  is  concerned  with  the  general  processes  of  gram¬ 
matical  history  in  Middle  English)  is  that  of  the  verbs 
belonging  to  the  3rd  or  ‘  regular  ’  weak  class,  descended  from 
O.E.  verbs  with  infinitive  in  -ian,  or  conjugated  on  this 
model.1 

A  and  B  together  contain  some  550  of  these  verbs  in  over 
3,300  instances.  Of  these  more  than  280  are  descended  from 
recorded  O.E.  verbs  ;  about  150  are  M.E.  verbs  (by  chance  not 
recorded  in  O.E.,  or  recent  formations  from  current  nouns 
and  adjectives,  or  words  of  obscure  origin)  ;  about  20  are 
Norse,  and  about  100  French.  A  study  of  these  3,300  instances 
allows  one  to  establish  for  AB  a  regular  paradigm  to  which 

virginity  which  he  rigidly  protects.  Juliene  endures  brutal  flagellation  ; 
but  that  one  who  finds  this  edifying  should  discourage  its  voluntary 
practice  is  no  more  surprising  than  a  man  who  honours  courage  in  battle 
while  advising  caution  in  ciossing  the  street. 

1  This  I  hope  to  expound  elsewhere  at  greater  length  and  with  special 
reference  to  AB. 


118  AN  CHEN E  WISSE  AND  II A  LI  MEILIIAI) 

only  about  6  exceptions  per  1,000  instances  can  be  found 
and  many  of  these  have  a  significance  in  being  consistently 
employed  and  being  common  to  A  and  B.1 

This  regular  paradigm  is  simply  the  O.E.  paradigm  pre¬ 
served  in  all  its  details,  except  as  modified  by  one  or  two 
normal  phonetic  changes  of  universal  application  :  namely, 
(1)  the  weakening  of  unaccented  vowels  to  e ;  (2)  the  change 
of  i{f)e  to  %  after  a  long  or  polysyllabic  stem,  while  ie 
remained  after  a  short  stem,  or  short  stem  that  received  a 
strong  secondary  accent  ( ondswerien ).  The  latter  ‘  sound- 
law  ’  is  of  great  importance  to  the  history  of  M.E.  inflexion. 
The  verbs  studied  provide  between  one  and  two  thousand 
instances  of  its  operation,  and  a  recognition  of  this  can  be 
made  of  considerable  service  to  etymology.  The  proportion 
of  exceptions  is  almost  negligible,  and  such  as  exist  are 
usually  capable  of  explanation. 

We  have  in  fact  a  regular  relation  between  pollen  [ ich  polie, 
he  poled,  ha  polled ,  imper.  pole ,  polled,  subj.  polie(n),  pres.  p. 
Poliende ]  and  fondin  [ich  fondi,  he  ponded,  ha  fondid,  imper. 
fonde,  fondid,  subj.  fond i(n),  pres,  p .fondinde]. 

This  is  remarkable  enough,  and  sufficient  evidence  at  once 
of  a  relatively  undisturbed  dialect  and  of  a  text  little  adul¬ 
terated  linguistically.  But  its  full  force  is  best  appreciated 
if  one  seeks  to  discover  the  same  rules  in  other  manuscripts 
of  A  or  B.  There  is  no  space  here  to  demonstrate  this.  But 
very  little  examination  of  the  manuscripts  is  required.  R 
comes  best  out  of  such  a  test — its  distinction  from  (AB)  is  not 
observable  so  much  in  this  point  as  in  other  more  minute 
points  of  phonology  and  spelling.  The  confusion  of  the  others 
varies  in  degree.  T  is,  of  course,  without  any  rules,  and 
cannot  even  keep  steady  in  the  employment  of  -ed,  - es ,  -en, 

1  For  instance,  schawin,  to  show,  forms  (under  the  influence  probably 
of  edeawen)  the  irregular  imperative  schaw,  and  pa.  t.  schawde.  Both 
these  ‘  exceptions  ’  are  regular  in  A  and  B — there  is  one  instance  only  of 
schawede  (in  Sawles  Warde).  Compare  the  ‘  consistent  irregularity  ’  of 
the  remarkable  AB  paradigm  warpen  (throw)  :  warpe  ;  pa.  t.  iceorp  ;  pi. 
and  subj.  wurpe{n) ;  pp.  iwarpen.  This  has  no  exceptions  in  AB,  and  no 
consistent  parallels  outside. 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  HALI  ME  IE  HAD  119 

let  alone  observe  a  distinction  between  ie  and  i.  Its  scribe 
may  or  may  not  have  belonged  to  Shropshire  or  other  places 
where  he  has  been  placed  (on  linguistic  evidence !),  but  his 
grammar  belongs  to  no  place  but  MS.  T.  The  irregularity  of 
the  Caius  MS.  and  of  Nero  can  be  gauged  by  a  glance  at  the 
specimens  in  Hall’s  Early  Middle  English. 

This  development  could,  I  believe,  also  be  made  to  yield 
conclusions  concerning  date.  It  is  obvious  that  the  i  forms 
depend,  on  earlier  ie  forms,  and  that  a  text  regularly  pre¬ 
serving  ie  in  all  verbs  of  this  class  is  probably  older  than 
one  in  which  ie  has  diverged  into  i  and  ie.  How  far  we  are 
to  assume  different  rates  of  'phonetic  change  (as  distinct  from 
changes  due  to  grammatical  analogy)  in  different  regions  in 
the  Middle  English  period,  is  a  difficult  question.  In  the 
West  in  closely  related  areas  a  different  rate  of  change  is 
unlikely. 

Now  the  change  iye  >  %  is  already  observable  in  Orm 
(laffdij) — his  verbal  forms  lokenn,  &c.,  are  not  phonetic 
developments.  A  greater  rate  of  change  in  his  area  may  be 
conceded.  But  if  we  come  west,  we  discover  that  as  we 
approach  the  date  1200  we  get  not  fondin/polien  but 
fondien/ polien.  This  latter  is  substantially  the  state  of  the 
language  of  the  longer  Layamon  text,  and  one  of  the  points 
in  which  that  confused  document  shows  analysable  regu¬ 
larity.  The  same  is  true  of  such  ‘  O.E.  Homilies  ’  as  the 
Sermon  for  the  First  Sunday  in  Lent  (O.E.  Horn,  i,  pp.  28  ff.), 
a  text  which  has,  as  a  main  ingredient,  language  related  in 
some  remarkable  ways  to  AB  (kimeS,  bluffeliche,  eskien  are 
examples). 

The  Owl  and  Nightingale  (C)  observes  much  the  same  rules 
as  AB,  with  a  few  exceptions,  but  it  contains  at  least  one 
specifically  ‘  Kentish  ’  form  wnienge  [=  ivunienge]  614.  This 
curious  form  is  the  norm  in  early  Kentish,  where  similar  rules 
to  those  of  AB  can  be  observed.  [The  differences  are  (1) 
change  of  i  to  e  before  d  ( fundi  but  fanded) ;  (2)  wunienge  for 
AB  wununge.  The  latter  is  due  to  regularizing  the  relations 
of  fandi(n),  fandinge  to  wunien ,  *wuninge.] 

An  analysis  of  all  the  early  M.E.  texts  on  this  basis  pro- 


120  ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  II A  LI  MEIBHAD 

vides  interesting  results,  which  it  is  impossible  to  exhibit  here. 
Among  these  are  the  demonstration  that  the  most  important 
cleavage  in  M.E.  was  between  the  areas  (W.  and  S.)  where 
the  O.E.  system  of  verbs  was  retained  and  slowly  modified 
phonetically,  and  those  where  it  was  violently  dislocated  and 
remodelled  before  the  M.E.  period  proper  began.  Orm  repre¬ 
sents  the  latter.  It  is  clear  that  his  lokenn  and  fiolenn  are 
not  phonetic  developments.  The  phonetic  developments  are 
seen  in  laffdig,  and  the  plural  adjective  wurrpig  (beside 
manie).  By  pure  phonetic  development  we  should  say 
warny,  groany  to  this  day.  In  the  Scandinavianized  part  of 
England  the  complete  divergence  in  conjugation  between 
English  and  Norse  verbs  in  -ian,  -ia  ( fandian ,  fandode  : 
eggia,  eggiada :  krejia,  kraffla),  and  their  relative  rarity  in 
Norse,  had  led  to  a  general  levelling,  probably  in  late  O.E. 
times,  in  favour  of  -an  for  all.  Of  this  late  O.E.  ‘  lingua  franca  ’ 
with  its  Hufan ,  *fandan  one  example  has,  by  chance,  been 
preserved — on  the  dial  on  Kirkdale  Church  (Yorks.)  dating 
from  about  a.d.  1064. 1 

Where  English  remained  intact,  and  the  few  Scandinavian 
verbs  were  fitted  into  the  native  system  (mostly  being 
absorbed  by  the  fo'adin  or  polien  classes),  we  had,  until  the 
thirteenth  century  was  well  advanced,  a  regular  development 
from  O.E.,  which  is  clearly  observable  where  the  text  is  pure. 
The  particular  stage  represented  by  AB  cannot  in  the  West, 
I  suggest,  be  put  back  much  before  1225,  if  as  far.  It  is 
possible  that  English  would  long  have  halted  at  some  such  stage 
(slightly  modified  by  complete  loss  of  -n,  perhaps,  and  change 
of  -ith  to  -eth),  had  the  cultivation  of  English  remained  in  the 
West.  How  far  this  stage  could  be  preserved  even  in  the 
fourteenth  century  in  a  rustic  and  archaic  dialect,  Dan  Michel 
shows.  None  the  less  it  is  clear  that  the  stage  was  one  of 

See  A.  R.  Green,  Sundials  (S.P.C.K.  1926),  p.  14.  The  inscription 
leads  at  the  sides  :  Orm  .  gamal .  |  suna  bohte .  scs  |  gregorivs  min  |  ster  . 
Sonne  .  hi|t  wes  ael .  to^bro  ||  can .  7  tofalan  .  /  he  |  hit  let  macan  newan 
from  |  grunde  xpe  .  y  scs  gregori|vs  .  in  .  eadward  .  dagum  .  eng  .  in  tosti . 
dagum  .  eorl.  In  the  centre :  pis  is  dae-ges  solmere  se  [merce  ?]  |  set  ileum 
tide  .  7  hawarS  me  wrohte  y  brand  prs. 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  II A  LI  MEIEHAD  121 

delicate  balance  easily  disturbed,  and  one  that  would  certainly 
fail  to  be  understood  by  any  scribe  or  speaker  not  instinctively 
guided  by  the  usage  of  his  mother-dialect.  Endless  confusion 
would  be  certain  to  arise  (and  did  arise)  wherever  a  scribe  and 
his  copy  differed  in  the  matter  of  these  verbs.  The  mere 
statistics  of  regularity  in  this  respect  in  AB  preclude  us, 
therefore,  from  supposing  with  any  probability  that  these 
texts  are  copies  of  originals  of  an  older  period  ( fondien  text 
and  fondin  scribe  ;  or  fondin  text  and  fonden  scribe J).  There  is 
only  one  (very  doubtful)  case  of  ie  after  a  long  stem  in  all  AB.2 
There  are  a  very  few  certain  cases  of  -e  for  -i,  but  their  percent¬ 
age  is  minute,  and  most  of  them  are  explicable  as  accidental 
errors,  or  the  occasional  false  analogies  of  speech  and  writing 3 : 

1  A  stage  fonde(n)/luuie(n)  was  reached,  later  than  AB  and  not  then 
universally,  by  substitution  of  the  e-endings  of  all  other  classes  of  verbs 
for  the  i-endings.  The  change  was  not  phonetic,  at  any  rate  in  the  case 
of  final  -i.  It  led  also  to  the  generalization  of  luui-  as  the  stem  (later  M.E. 
lovyeth  sg.  and  pi.,  lovyere ).  Of  this  generalization  there  is  no  trace  in 
AB.  There  variation  ie/e  is  still  an  inflexional  variation  accompanied  by 
clear  distinctions  of  sense. 

2  eadmodied  imper.  pi.  A  76/11.  N  reads  (p.  278)  makieS  eadmod  8; 
meokeH  our  heorle.  This  has  the  support  of  alliteration,  and  A  might  be 
an  accidental  error  for  eadmod  [mak~\ied.  But  in  that  case  the  error 
would  he  significant,  since  T  and  C  have  eadmodieL  More  probable  is  a 
new  formation  direct  from  M.E.  eadmodi  humble.  This,  having  i  as  part 
of  the  stem,  would  naturally  follow  the  conjugation  of  biburien  pi.  biburiect 
(O.E.  bebyrgeafr),  as  did  French  verbs  of  similar  form  chastien,  studien. 
Beyond  eadmode[de]  pa.  t.,  O.E.  Horn,  i,  p.  17,  this  is  the  only  occurrence 
of  this  verb,  and  direct  descent  from  O.E.  eadmodian  is  doubtful. 

3  For  instance  Jirsen,  Juliene  17,  beside  the  normal  Jirsin  ‘remove, 
abandon  ’  of  AB.  But  this  should  be  firren  (a  synonym  of  firsin).  There 
are  a  few  cases  of  s/r  confusion,  but  they  are  not  necessary  to  explain  this 
error.  In  these  texts  contamination  of  synonyms,  always  possible  in 
copying  and  found  frequently  at  all  periods,  is  specially  easy  owing  to 
the  stylistic  trick  of  using  together  two  alliterative  synonyms  (often  ety¬ 
mological  variants  lik efolhin  and  fulien).  One  of  these  (to  the  sense) 
unnecessary  words  was  often  dropped,  or  the  two  blended.  An  interesting 
case  of  contamination  may  here  be  noticed  by  the  way,  and  as  a  warning 
to  the  seekers  after  occasional  spellings  :  A  64/26  has  ofsaruet,  but  this 
is  not  an  early  example  of  er>ar,  but  a  contamination  of  of-seruet  with 
of-eamet,  both  familiar  words  of  identical  sense  (being  different  stages 
in  the  translation  of  deservir)  in  A  and  B. 


122  A  NO  RENE  WISSE  AND  II A  LI  ME  IB  II AD 


out  of  about  1,000  instances  only  about  8  remain  as  certain 
‘  exceptions’  after  examination  (e.g.  blissen,  subj.  Katerine  846, 
R.  blissin).  Whether  these,  out  of  the  many  hundreds  of 
instances,  are  sufficient  to  make  copying  by  a  ‘  fonclen  ’  scribe 
a  necessary  explanation,  I  leave  to  others  to  decide.  Person¬ 
ally  I  have  no  doubt  that  if  we  could  call  the  scribes  of  A  and 
B  before  us  and  silently  point  to  these  forms,  they  would 
thank  us,  pick  up  a  pen  and  immediately  substitute  the  -in 
forms,  as  certainly  as  one  of  the  present  day  would  emend 
a  minor  aberration  from  standard  spelling  or  accidence,  if  it 
was  pointed  to. 

This  is  only  a  brief  and  inconclusive  sketch  of  one  item  of 
the  comparison  between  A  and  B,  but  I  believe  it  offers  some 
evidence  suggesting,  if  not  demonstrating,  that  A  and  B  are 
uniquely  related,  and  that  the  events  in  the  textual  history  of 
each  took  place  within  less  than  a  generation  and  round  about 
A.  D.  1225. 

I  append  in  illustration,  and  as  a  sample,  a  list  of  the  verbs 
of  the  class  discussed  that  have  a  recorded  O.E.  etymon,  and 
also  appear  in  AB  in  at  least  one  of  the  special  forms  requir¬ 
ing  i  or  ie  by  the  rule  mentioned  above. 

This  list  will  serve  not  only  as  a  sample  of  evidence  for 
this  ‘  sound-law  ’,  but  also  a  fair  sample  of  the  unity  of 
phonology  and  spelling  of  AB.  I  have  recorded  every  variation 
of  spelling  in  these  lists  that  2,355  instances  (about)  could 
provide.  The  forms  presented  are  not  my  normalizations, 
but  the  standard  forms  of  language  (AB).  The  amount  of 
variation  is  in  fact  exaggerated,  since  many  of  the  recorded 
variations  are  very  rare  and  probably  accidental :  e.  g.  easkin 
AB,  34 times,  eskest  in  Katerine,  once.  [Certain  regular  alterna¬ 
tions  have  been  disregarded  :  e.g.  cu,  for  ku  ( lokien ,  locunge ); 
see ,  sc  (jiscen,  yisceunge).] 

I.  fondin- class.  A  and  B :  blescin,  blissin,  bi-blodgin, 
chapin,  cneolin,  acou(e)rin  and  courin,  adeadin,  ?  eadmodin, 
earnin  and  of-earnin,  easkin  ( esk -),  eilin,  elnin,  endin,  erndin, 
euenin,  faleivin,  federin  (feSrian),  festnin,  ( uestnin )  and 
unfestnin,  firsin,  folhin,  fondin,  fostrin,  f  reinin  (?  frsegnian), 
frourin ,  gederin,  granin,  grapin,  grenin  (grenian),  grennin. 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  MALI  MEIBHAD 


123 


jarkin,jiscin,  halsin,  bi-he{a)fdin,  heardin,  hearviin,  hercnin, 
hihin,  hondlin,  hongin  and  ahongin,  ladin,  lechnin,  leornin, 
likin  and  mislikin,  limin  (limian)  and  unlimin,  lokin  and 
bi-lokin  and  luuelokin,  milcin,  muchlin  ( muclin ),  mun(e)gin, 
murdrin  and  amurdrin,  nempnin,  offrin,  openin,  pinin, 
reauin  and  bi-reauin,  bi-reowsin,  rikenin  (recenian),  saluin, 
schawin  (shawin),  smedin,  sorhin,  sundrin,  sun(e)gin,  sutelin, 
timb'in,  tukin  to  wundre,  pon{c)kin,  preatin,  a-prusmin, 
Purlin ,  wakenin  and  awakenin,  walewin,  wardin,  warnin, 
wergin  (wergian),  wilnin,  windwin,  wiuin,  wohin,  worin, 
wreastlin,  vmndin,  ivundrin  and  awundrin,  wursin,  wur&gin 
( wurdgin ),  and  unwurdgin.  96. 

A  only:  bemin  (bemian),  birlin,  blindfe(a)llin  (blint-), 
borhin,  bridlin,  clad  in,  cleansin ,  clutin  and  bi-clutin,  colin 
and  acolin,  druncnin,  feattin,  gnuddin  (O.E.  gnuddian), 
godin,  greatin,  heowin,  herb(e)arhin,  hungrin  and  ofhungret, 
huntin,  meadelin,  neappin,  se(c)clin,  seowin,  stoppin  and 
forstoppin,  bitacnin,  teohedin  (teogojnan),  totin,  or-trowin, 
Peostrin,  winkin ,  wlispin.  35.  B  only :  beddin,  cleaterin, 
doskin,  eardin,  *ferkin  ‘  feed  V  hersumin ,  hoppin,  leanin 
(hlaenian),  lickin,  lutlin,  medin  (median),  motin,  rarin, 
smirkin  (smercian),  stupin,  teonin,  wepnin,  bivrihelin,  won- 
drin,  wonnin  (wannian).  20. 

II.  Polien- class.  A  and  B  :  blikien ,  bodien,  carien,  cleopien 
and  bi-cleopien,  cwakien,  cwikien  and  a-cwikien,fre(a)mien, 
gleadien,  gremien,  heatien,  herien,  forhohien,  hopien,  leadien, 
liuien  (and  libben),  lutien  and  ed-lutien,  luuien  and  bi-luuien, 
makien,  munien  (and  rnunnen),  ondswerien  ( ont on-), 
rotien  and  for-rotien,  schapien,  scheomien,  schunien,  slakien, 
8mirien,  spealien  (spelian),  spearien,  sturien,  swerirn  (present 
stem  only,  remainder  strong),  talien ,  temien,  trukien,  peauien, 
Polien,  wakien,  werien  ‘  defend  ’,  wonien,  wreodien,  wunien 

1  H  538  feskin  and  foskin.  A  sense  ‘swaddle  ’—impossible  to  etymo¬ 
logize— is  given  in  the  glossary.  The  alliterative  grouping  with  foskin 
clearly  points  to  O.E.  fercian,  which  is  chiefly  recorded  in  senses  ‘  provide 
for,  provide  with  food  though  this  is  the  only  case  of  the  sense  in  M.E. 
There  are  other  cases  of  s/r  confusion  (here  aided  by  fostrin ) :  e.  g.  goder 
«=  godes,  God’s,  710. 


124  A  N (IRENE  W1SSE  AND  MALI  MEIi) HAD 


and purh-wunien  (and  inwuniende).  46.  A  only:  druhien 
and  a-druhien ,  for-druhien,  Jikien,  jeonien,  holien,  leonien, 
notien  (‘  partake  of  red.  1  be  employed  ’ *)  and  mis-notien, 
prikien,  schrapien,  sm eodien  ‘  forge  tilien,  werien  ‘  wear’  (and 
pp.  pi.  for-iuerede),  wleatien  ‘nauseate’.  15.  B  only:  beadien, 
borien,  dearien,  gristbe(a)tien,  l eodien  (libian,  leobian),  readieu 
(aredian  ;  see  note).  6. 

Here  we  have,  counting  separately  verbs  with  and  without 
a  prefix,  about  218  verbs  :  fondin- class  151,  and  the  less 
numerous  pollen- class  (which  contains  none  the  less  some  very 
common  verbs)  67.  The  number  of  occurrences  of  i  or  ie 
forms  is  about  1,081,  of  other  forms  about  1,274,  in  all  about 
2,355.  The  number  of  irregular  forms  not  clearly  due  to 
misunderstanding  of  the  context  or  other  scribal  accidents, 
and  which  are  not  consistently  used  in  A  and  B,  are  about  6 
in  number.  One  or  two,  however,  of  the  verbs  here  appear¬ 
ing  in  the  pollen- class  have  been,  or  still  are,  credited  with 
a  long  stem-vowel  in  O.E.  I  append  a  note  on  these  cases : 
lutien  (edlutien),  trukien,  (a)druhien,  wleatien,  gristbeatien, 
readien.  O.E.  lutian  and  trucian  are  now  generally  admitted 
on  other  evidence ;  the  forms  of  AB  should  make  lutian  and 
trucian  disappear  finally.  O.E.  ( a)drugian  is  still  always 
printed  with  a  long  stem-vowel,  but  since  the  occurrences  in 
metre  are  not  decisive  for  this,  and  a  short  vowel  is  perfectly 
possible  etymologically,  we  may  assume  with  fair  certainty 
drugian — it  must  be  remembered  that  the  evidence  for  the 
regular  working  of  the  rule  in  AB  is  in  fact  much  greater  in 
volume  than  even  the  large  number  of  cases  provided  by 
inherited  verbs.  The  long  mark  should  also  disappear  (as  now 
usually  recognized)  from  O.E.  wlatian  and  wlxtta.  Here  we 
have  the  additional  evidence  of  the  regular  AB  ea  for  O.E.  & 
(dialectal  ea)  in  open  syllables,  and  of  the  rhyme  in  The  Owl 
and  Nightingale  854. 

1  A  46  v/17  penne  ha  servid  wel  pe  ancrehare  leafdi,  hwen  ha  notied  ham 
wel  in  hare  sawle  neode.  Here  the  clear  and  decisive  forms  of  A  put  the 
meaning  and  construction  beyond  doubt,  both  of  which  are  unclear  in  N 
(and  the  translation  p.  178).  Note  the  distinction  between  notien  and 
notin  ‘  note  ’. 


ANCRENE  WISSE  AND  IIALI  MEW IIAI)  125 

readien  has  not,  I  believe,  hitherto  been  allowed  to  be  an 
O.E.  verb  or  pi'operly  interpreted.  It  provides  an  example  of 
the  service  to  etymology  of  an  analysis  of  AB.  Its  only 
occuiience  is  in  hawles  Warde  81:  for  pet  ne  mei  na  tunge 
telle) i  (sc.  hv'uclt  is  helle),  ah  after  pet  ich  rmei  A  con  pertowart 
ich  chulle  readien.  The  sense  1  discourse  ’  proposed  by  Hall 
(E.M.E.  ii.  501,  511)  does  not  fit  p&r  towart  at  all,  quite  apart 
from  the  iact  that  the  required  etymology  (a  formation  from 
raed)  is  against  the  present  rule.  O.E.  a-redian,  ge-redian, 
provides  us  with  a  satisfactory  form  (for  the  ea  spelling 
cf.  freamien,  spealien),  and  aredian  (to)  ‘find  the  way  to, 
make  one  s  way  to  ’  with  a  satisfactoi’y  sense — 1  according 
to  my  power  and  knoAvledge  I  will  make  an  effort  in  that 
direction  ’. 

gristbeatien  is  a  more  difficult  case.  In  our  texts  it  occurs 
only  in  Jul.  pp.  67,  69,  gristbetede,  gristbeatien  (R.  grispatede, 
grispatien) ;  for  All.  (N)  p.  326  gristbatede  A  has  risede 
‘  trembled  .  O.E.  gristbatian  is  usually  given  a,  owing  to 
the  apparent  etymological  connexion  with  bitan,  grisbitian, 
although  such  a  vowel-grade  in  such  a  formation  is  abnormal. 
A  shortening  of  the  element  -bat-,  either  phonetically  or  under 
the  influence  of  the  synonymous  gristbitian,  before  the  M.E- 
development  began,  will  pi’obably  be  conceded,  so  that  we 
need  not  consider  this  form  as  an  isolated  exception  (supported 
as  it  is  by  R).  My  faith  in  the  language  of  AB  is  possibly 
excessive,  but  I  would  go  further  and  suggest  that  the  O.E. 
word  was  grisbatian  *gristbeatian  and  never  had  a  long  vowel. 
Shortening  from  -bdtian  is  unlikely  in  view  of  the  secondary 
accent  that  is  required,  and  the  clear  apprehension  of  the 
composite  nature  of  the  word  (shown  in  the  B  and  Layamon 
spellings).  A  shortened  form  -bdtian  from  -6dficm.would  fit 
well  enough  as  the  antecedent  of  the  forms  outside  B.1  But 
the  B  forms  do  not  fit.  Reduction  to  an  obscure  vowel  is  in  the 
nature  of  the  case  ruled  out  even  for  the  form  gristbetede.  A 

1  In  addition  to  those  of  R  and  N  there  occur  :  Layamon  1886  grist- 
batinge,  and  5189  gristbat,  possibly  an  error  for  the  preceding  ;  XI  Pains 
of  Hell  248  gristbatynge  of  tepe  ;  O.E.  Horn,  i,  p.  38  waning  and  graming 
and  topen  gri&bating. 


126  ANCBENE  WISSE  AND  HAL  I  MEIBHAB 

variation  ‘  AB  ea,  e — R  ancl  other  texts  a  ’  points  in  all  cases  to 
O.E.  a  (Germanic  a  not  a  secondary  shortening)  in  open 
syllables,  as  in  the  cases  gleadien,  heatien,  uieatien,  above.  In 
this  case,  of  course,  the  etymology  of  gristbatian  is  obscure. 
I  suspect  that  it  is  a  partial  assimilation  of  some  other  word, 
by  chance  not  recorded,  to  gristbitian  (a  purely  English 
formation).1 

J.  R.  R.  Tolkien. 

1  * gristgramian  ?  Cf.  O.H.G.  grisgramon,  mod.  German  Griesgram; 
0.  S.  gristgrimmo.  The  graining  and  grisbating  of  the  homily  for  the  first 
Sunday  in  Lent  may  be  a  last  trace  of  this  and  due  to  an  older  original. 
Graining  occurs,  I  believe,  nowhere  else,  and  emendation  to  granting  has 
been  suggested ;  but  the  homily  does  not  use  -ung.  Otherwise  it  has 
some  forms  closely  allied  to  (AB) :  see  above. 


Date  Due 

apr  is 

CAT.  NO.  23  233  PRINTED  IN  U.S.A.